PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - TV

Viera TX-L32D28BW - TV PANASONIC - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Viera TX-L32D28BW PANASONIC in PDF.

📄 108 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - page 1
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about Viera TX-L32D28BW PANASONIC

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your TV in PDF format for free! Find your manual Viera TX-L32D28BW - PANASONIC and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Viera TX-L32D28BW by PANASONIC.

USER MANUAL Viera TX-L32D28BW PANASONIC

Operating Instructions

LCD Television

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a flat-screen monitor (no text or symbols)

VIERA

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 3

VIERA IMAGE VIEWER

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 8

dlna CERTIFIED

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 9

AVCHD™

DOLBY DIGITAL PLUS

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 10

HDMI

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 11

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting

with freesat HD

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 12

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read these instructions carefully before operating this product and retain them for future reference.

The images shown in this manual are for illustrative purposes only.

"B" model no. suffix denotes UK model.

English

U.K. Standard

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - LCD Television - 13

TQB0E0927

Features

freesat HD tuner built-in ■

Receives freesat - free digital satellite broadcasts in the UK

This TV has a built-in freesat HD tuner.

freesat is a free digital TV service which broadcasts via satellite so you can receive TV, radio, interactive TV, and HD TV with crystal clear reception.

You can enjoy sharp pictures, vivid colours, multi-channel sound, and various services with the interactive content.

DVB-T / DVB-T2 tuner built-in ■

Receives DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) digital terrestrial broadcasts

DVB-T2 is an advanced digital terrestrial system for more efficient transmission.

Available DVB-T2 broadcasts will be tuned automatically when you perform DVB Auto Setup.

GUIDE Plus+ ■ (p. 21)

This TV supports Gemstar-TV Guide sent from the GUIDE Plus+ system.

■ Sharp pictures and clear sound with HDMI connection (p. 97)

Enjoy high definition digital picture and high quality sound by using an HDMI cable.

● This TV incorporates HDMI (Version 1.4 with Content Type, Audio Return Channel) and HDMI (Version 1.3a with Deep Colour) technology.

Using USB devices ■

Enjoy recording and playback the digital TV programmes to the USB HDD. (p. 62 and p. 71)

Enjoy the photo, video and music in the USB Flash Memory on Media Player. (p. 66)

Wireless LAN Adaptor for the network connection. (p. 6 and p. 13)

Entering characters with the USB Keyboard in VIERA CAST. (p. 83)

Timer Programming ■ (p. 22 and p. 52)

Timer Programming enables you to use functions such as programme reminder and programme recording to the external recorder / registered USB HDD.

■ VIERA IMAGE VIEWER - SD Card viewer in Media Player (p. 66 - 70)

Enjoy your photos or videos recorded on an SD Card on the TV screen.

DXC Card

This TV supports SDXC Card. SDXC is the latest standard of SD Card and a higher storage capacity card.

AVCHD

It is possible to play moving pictures recorded on an SD Card or a USB Flash Memory in AVCHD format.

AVCHD is a high definition video recording format. (p. 66)

vX

Offers good compatibility when going from PC to TV, etc. for easy enjoyment of moving pictures. DivX is a video codec that was developed by DivX, Inc. (p. 95)

LNA

DLNA is a standard that makes digital electronics easier and more convenient to use on a home network. For example, you can enjoy watching photos and videos stored in the PC connected to your home network by accessing from the TV. (p. 80)

■ VIERA CAST - Enjoy great web entertainment (p. 83)

Enjoy the internet contents on the TV such as photos, videos, weather, video communication (ex. Skype™), etc. through an easy-to-use web interface that is built into the TV.

■ Link up and control the connected equipment with "Q-Link" and "VIERA Link" (p. 84 - 91)

Q-Link and VIERA Link provide easy recording and playback, creation of a home theatre without complicated settings, etc.

■ VIERA TOOLS - Display special feature icons for easy accessibility (p. 30)

Special features (such as VIERA Link, Media Player and DLNA operations) can be accessed easily by using the VIERA TOOLS button.

■ Owner ID (p. 56)

Owner ID is an anti-theft function. Entering the PIN number and owner's personal information will help the Police to determine the owner in the case of theft.

■ Supports Audio Description signal (p. 17 and p. 33)

Audio Description (when broadcast) adds an additional soundtrack to describe events on screen (narration) and aids understanding and enjoyment, particularly for visually-impaired viewers.

You can switch Audio Description service Auto or Off, and adjust the volume of the description soundtrack independently of the main volume.

Digital Switchover for Terrestrial broadcasts

Starting in late 2007 and ending in 2012, TV services in the UK will go completely digital, TV region by TV region.

If you have any questions, please call Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or visit www.digitaluk.co.uk

Digital Switchover will cover a period of several weeks. When it starts you will lose all Analogue TV channels and some Digital TV channels will be missing.

You will need to retune your TV each time this happens to recover your digital channels. Analogue channels are permanently turned off, it will not be possible to recover them.

● To retune your TV → "Auto Setup" in "DVB Tuning Menu"-DVB mode (p. 41)

Users of cable or satellite boxes should still retune the TV to continue to receive Freeview channels via their aerial. (Your Analogue channel for viewing Cable or Satellite services will change to a new position.)

Due to the digital reception technologies involved, quality of the digital signals may be relatively low in some cases, despite good reception of analogue channels.

Contents

FULL HD ■

This TV uses a high definition panel to produce high definition pictures close to their original resolution.

HD TV 1080p ■

This TV supports high definition TV signals.

Dolby Digital Plus decoder ■

It is possible to decode Dolby Digital Plus audio track (multi-channel sound) and output as a Dolby Digital multi-channel sound signal from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Dolby Digital Plus decoder ■ - 1

IPS LED LCD TV

This TV uses IPS (In Plane Switching) panel with LED backlight.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - IPS LED LCD TV - 1

Intelligent Frame Creation

This increases the frame count and removes juddering movements, for smooth and flicker-less motion images with high resolution.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Intelligent Frame Creation - 1

Wide Viewing Angle

This LCD panel offers 178-degree viewing angle. This delivers beautiful images regardless of the viewing angle.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Wide Viewing Angle - 1

digital tick

The digital tick logo indicates that a digital tuner is built-in.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - digital tick - 1

Freeview HD

Freeview HD is the way to enjoy high definition digital TV for free.

Keep the TV away from these types of equipment

Electronic equipment

Do not place video equipment too close to the TV, electromagnetic interference may distort pictures / sound.

Equipment with an infrared sensor

This TV emits a low level of infrared rays which may interfere with the operation of other equipment.

Be Sure to Read

Safety Precautions (Warning / Caution) 4

Quick Start Guide

Accessories / Options 6

Identifying Controls 8

Basic Connection 10

Auto Setup 12

Enjoy your TV!

Basic Features

Watching TV 16

Using TV Guide 20

Viewing Teletext 25

Watching External inputs....28

How to Use VIERA TOOLS 30

How to Use Menu Functions 31

Advanced Features

Retuning from Setup Menu 40

Tuning and Editing Channels 42

Shipping Condition 51

Timer Programming 52

Child Lock 54

Input Labels 55

Owner ID 56

Using Common Interface 57

Updating the TV Software 58

Displaying PC Screen on TV 59

Advanced Picture Settings 60

USB HDD Recording 62

Using Media Player 66

Using Network Services 74

(DLNA / VIERA CAST / freesat)

Link Functions 84

(Q-Link / VIERA Link)

External Equipment 92

FAQs, etc.

Technical Information 94

FAQs 99

On screen messages 102

Maintenance 104

Glossary 104

Licence 105

Index 106

Specifications 107

Safety Precautions

Warning

Mains plug and lead■

To help avoid risk of electrical shock, fire, damage or injury, please follow the warnings below:

This TV is designed to operate on AC 220-240 V, 50 / 60 Hz.

Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet.

Ensure that the mains plug is easily accessible.

Remove the mains plug when cleaning the TV.

Do not touch the mains plug with a wet hand.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 1

Do not damage the mains lead.

Do not place a heavy object on the lead.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 3

Do not place the lead • near a high temperature object.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 5

Do not pull on the lead. • Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 7

Do not move the TV with the lead plugged into a • socket outlet.

Do not twist the lead, bend it excessively or • stretch it.

- Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.

- Ensure the TV does not crush the mains lead.

If you detect anything unusual, immediately switch off the mains supply switch and remove the mains plug.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Mains plug and lead■ - 8

text_image AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED MAINS PLUG

FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.

This TV is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this mains plug. Shall the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark 📋 or the BSI mark 🌐 on the body of the fuse.

If the mains plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the mains plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.

A replacement fuse cover may be purchased from your local dealer.

If the fitted moulded mains plug is unsuitable for the socket outlet in your home, then the fuse shall be removed and the mains plug cut off and disposed of safety. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off mains plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new mains plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.

If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT: – The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: – Blue: Neutral Brown: Live

As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your mains plug, proceed as follows.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the mains plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the mains plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Under no circumstances should either of these wires be connected to the Earth terminal of the three pin mains plug, marked with the letter E or the earth symbol ⊕.

How to replace the fuse

For plug type shown in example 1:

Lift out the removable fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse, then refit securely into the mains plug (see example 1).

For plug type shown in example 2:

Lift open the fuse compartment, in the mains plug, with a screwdriver, and replace the fuse, then press the fuse cover down securely (see example 2).

Example 1
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED MAINS PLUG - 1

Example 2
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED MAINS PLUG - 2

Warning

Take care

To help avoid risk of electrical shock, fire, damage or injury, please follow the warnings below:

- Do not remove covers and never modify the TV yourself as live parts are accessible when they are removed. There are no user serviceable parts inside.

Do not expose the TV to rain or excessive moisture. This TV must not be exposed to dripping or splashing water and objects filled with liquid, such as vases, must not be placed on top of or above the TV.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Take care - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Take care - 2

text_image they are

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Take care - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Take care - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Take care - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Take care - 6

Do not expose the TV to direct sunlight and other sources of heat. To prevent fire never place any type of candle or naked flame on top or near the TV.

Do not place the TV on sloped or unstable surfaces.

Do not insert foreign objects into the TV through the air vents.

- Do not use an unapproved stand / mounting equipment. Be sure to ask your local Panasonic dealer to perform the setup or installation of approved wall-hanging brackets.

Do not apply strong force or impact to the display panel.

This TV is designed for Table-top use.

To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times - 1

Small object■

This product contains possibly dangerous parts that can be breathed in or swallowed by young children accidentally.

Keep the dangerous parts out of reach of young children.

- Do not allow children to handle SD Card. As with any small object, the SD Card could be swallowed by young children. Please remove SD Card immediately after use and store out of reach of young children.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Small object■ - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Small object■ - 2

Caution

Ventilation

Allow sufficient space around the TV in order to help prevent excessive heat, which could lead to early failure of some electronic components.

● Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspapers, tablecloths and curtains.
- Whether you are using the stand or not, always ensure the vents in the bottom of the TV are not blocked and there is sufficient space to enable adequate ventilation.

■ Moving the TV

Before moving the TV, disconnect all cables.

  • The TV is heavy. Move the TV with at least two people. Support as shown to avoid injury by the TV tipping or falling.
    ● Transport only in upright position.

■When not in use for a long time

This TV will still consume some power even in the Off mode, as long as the mains plug is still connected to a live socket outlet.
- Remove the mains plug from the wall socket when the TV is not in use for a prolonged period of time.

■Excessive volume

Do not expose your ears to excessive volume from the headphones. Irreversible damage can be caused.

Minimum distance
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Excessive volume - 1

text_image 10 10 10 10

(cm)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Excessive volume - 2

natural_image Illustration of two workers installing or adjusting a computer monitor, with one hand holding the screen (no text or symbols present)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Excessive volume - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Excessive volume - 4

Accessories / Options

Standard accessories

Remote Control ●N2QAYB000504

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Standard accessories - 1

Check that you have the accessories and items shown

Batteries for the Remote Control (2)

R6 → p. 8

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Standard accessories - 2

Stand TX-L32D28BP:

TX-L32D28BS: TX-L32D28BW:

TBLX0186 → p. 7

TX-L37D28BS:

TBLX0187

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Standard accessories - 3

Operating Instructions □ Product Registration Leaflet

Optional accessories

Wireless LAN Adaptor □ DY-WL10E-K

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Optional accessories - 1

Please contact your nearest Panasonic dealer to purchase the recommended optional accessories. For additional details, please refer to the manual of the optional accessories.

Caution

To use the Wireless LAN Adaptor, an access point needs to be obtained. It is recommended to use the Wireless LAN Adaptor with the extension cable. To avoid malfunctions caused by radio wave interface, keep the TV away from the devices such as other wireless LAN devices, microwaves and the devices that use 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz signals when using the Wireless LAN Adaptor. Depending on the area, this optional accessory may not be available. Additional information for Wireless LAN Adaptor and access point may be on the following web site. (English only) http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

Communication Camera TY-CC10W

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 1

Caution

This camera can be used on VIERA CAST (p. 83).
Please also read the manual of the camera.
Depending on the area, this optional accessory may not be available.
For details, consult your local Panasonic dealer.

Wall-hanging bracket □ ●TY-WK3L2RW

The angle of wall-hanging bracket can be adjusted in "zero tilting (vertical)" and "5-degree tilting" for this TV.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 1

Rear of the TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 2

text_image 200 mm *

Holes for wall-hanging bracket installation

*:100mm (TX-L32D28BP/TX-L32D28BS/TX-L32D28BW) :200mm (TX-L37D28BS)

Screw for fixing the TV onto the wall-hanging bracket (not supplied with the TV)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 3

natural_image Pure mechanical cross-section diagram without any text, numbers, or symbols

Depth of screw:

minimum : 8 mm

(TX-L32D28BP/

TX-L32D28BS/

TX-L32D28BW)

: 10 mm

(TX-L37D28BS)

maximum: 12 mm

Diameter : M4

(TX-L32D28BP/

TX-L32D28BS/

TX-L32D28BW)

:M6

(TX-L37D28BS)

(View from the side)

Warning

- Using other wall-hanging brackets, or installing a wall-hanging bracket by yourself have the risk of personal injury and product damage. In order to maintain the unit's performance and safety, be absolutely sure to ask your dealer or a licenced contractor to secure the wall-hanging brackets. Any damage caused by installing without a qualified installer will void your warranty.

- Carefully read the instructions accompanying optional accessories, and be absolutely sure to take steps to prevent the TV from falling off.

- Handle the TV carefully during installation since subjecting it to impact or other forces may cause product damage which will void your warranty.

- Do not mount the unit directly below ceiling lights (such as spotlights or halogen lights) which typically give off high heat. Doing so may warp or damage plastic cabinet parts.

Take care when fixing wall brackets to the wall. Wall mounted equipment shall not be grounded by metal within the wall. Always ensure that there are no electrical cables or pipes in the wall before hanging bracket.

- To prevent fall and injury, remove the TV from its fixed wall position when it is no longer in use for an extended period of time.

Attaching the stand

To help avoid risk of damage or injury by the TV tipping or falling, please follow the warnings and cautions below:

Warning

Do not disassemble or modify the stand.

Caution

Do not use with any other TVs or displays.

  • Do not use the stand if it becomes warped or physically damaged. If this occurs, contact your nearest Panasonic dealer immediately.
    During setup, make sure that all screws are securely tightened.
  • Ensure that the TV does not suffer any impact during installation of the stand.
    Ensure that children do not climb onto the stand.
    ● Install or remove the TV from the stand with at least two people.

Do not tilt the TV by placing something between the stand and the floor. TV may fall over and become damaged, and personal injury may result.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a right-hand rule (no sign) and a vertical device with motion lines, no text or symbols present.

Stand is very heavy. Please handle with both hands as shown in image.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 2

Assembly screw (4)

(silver)

XYN4+F12FJ

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 3

M4 × 12

Stand

●TBLX0186 (TX-L32D28BP, TX-L32D28BS, TX-L32D28BW)

TBLX0187 (TX-L37D28BS)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 4

■Securing the TV

Use the assembly screws to fasten the stand securely to the TV.

• Make sure that the screws are securely tightened.
- Carry out the work on a horizontal and level surface.
- Depending on the length of the screw driver you use, it is difficult to tighten the two screws at the bottom. Make sure all screws are securely tightened.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Securing the TV - 1

natural_image Diagram of a device's internal structure with mounting points and a close-up inset showing a component detail (no text or symbols present)

Foam mat or thick soft cloth

To prevent from falling, please secure the TV to the wall by using strong string or wire.

- Put the strong string or wire through the hole on the bottom rear of the TV as shown in the illustration.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To prevent from falling, please secure the TV to the wall by using strong string or wire. - 1

natural_image Technical diagram showing a door panel installation with a close-up of the door and a side view of a toilet (no text or symbols present)

Identifying Controls

Remote Control

Installing / removing remote's batteries ■
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remote Control - 1

text_image 1 Hook Pull open

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remote Control - 2

text_image 2 Close Note the correct polarity (+ or -)

Caution

  • Incorrect installation may cause battery leakage and corrosion, resulting in damage to the remote control. Do not mix old and new batteries.
  • Replace only with same or equivalent type. Do not mix different battery types (such as alkaline and manganese batteries). Do not use rechargeable (Ni-Cd) batteries.

Do not burn or break up batteries.

Batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, etc.

Make sure you dispose of batteries correctly.

- Ensure batteries are replaced correctly, there is danger of explosion and fire if battery is reversed. Do not disassemble or modify the remote control.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 1

text_image Media Player (p. 66) ● Switches to SD Card and USB device viewing / listening mode Standby On / Off switch ● Switches TV On or Off standby Main Menu (p. 31) ● Press to access the Picture, Sound and Setup Menus Aspect (p. 18) Channel / Programme Information (p. 17) ● Displays channel and programme information VIERA Link Menu (p. 88) ● Accesses VIERA Link Menu OK ● Confirms selections and choices ● Press after entering channel position by using numeric buttons to change a channel quickly Option Menu (p. 19) ● Easy optional setting for viewing, sound, etc. Coloured buttons (red-green-yellow-blue) ● Used for the selection, navigation and operation of various functions Teletext (p. 25) ● Switches to teletext mode / interactive services Subtitles (p. 18) ● Displays subtitles Numeric buttons ● Changes channel and teletext pages ● Sets characters ● When in Standby mode, switches TV On (Press for about 1 second) Sound Mute ● Switches sound mute On or Off Volume Up / Down Input mode selection ● TV - switches freesat / DVB / Analogue / Other Sat. mode (p. 16) ● AV - switches to AV input mode from Input Selection list (p. 28) Direct TV Recording (p. 86 and p. 88) ● Records programme immediately in DVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link or VIERA Link connection VIERA CAST (p. 83) ● Displays VIERA CAST home screen Exit ● Returns to the normal viewing screen VIERA TOOLS (p. 30) ● Easily accesses special features such as VIERA Link, Media Player and DLNA operations TV Guide (p. 20) ● Displays TV Guide Cursor buttons Makes selections and adjustments Return ● Returns to the previous menu / page Hold ● Freeze / unfreeze picture (p. 17) ● Holds the current teletext page (teletext mode) (p. 26) Index (p. 27) ● Returns to the teletext index page (teletext mode) Last view (p. 19) ● Switches to previously viewed channel or input mode Channel Up / Down ● Selects channel in sequence Connected equipment operations (p. 29, 64 and p. 90) Panasonic TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 2

text_image TV Function select • Volume / Contrast / Brightness / Colour / Sharpness / Tint (NTSC signal) / Bass ("Music" or "Speech" mode in the Sound Menu) / Treble ("Music" or "Speech" mode in the Sound Menu) / Balance / Auto Setup (p. 40 and p. 41) For changing TV channel up or down. When a function is selected by the 'F' button, press to increase or decrease the setting of the selected function. When in Standby mode, press either button for about 1 second to switch the TV On. Changes the input mode Mains power On / Off switch • Use to switch the mains power. If you turned the TV Off during Standby mode by the remote control last time, the TV will be in Standby mode when you turn the TV On with Mains power On / Off switch. Power and Timer LED • Red: Standby Green: On Orange: Timer Programming On Orange (flash): Recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording is in progress Red with orange flash: Standby with Timer Programming On, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording • The LED blinks when the TV receives a command from the remote control. C.A.T.S. (Contrast Automatic Tracking System) sensor • Senses brightness to adjust picture quality when "C.A.T.S." in the Picture Menu is set to "On" (p. 32) Remote control signal receiver • Do not place any objects between the TV remote control signal receiver and remote control.

Using the On Screen Displays

Many features available on this TV can be accessed via the On Screen Display menu.

■ How to use remote control

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ How to use remote control - 1

Open the main menu

Move the cursor / select the menu item

Access the menu / store settings after adjustments have been made or options have been set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ How to use remote control - 2

Exit the menu system and return to the normal viewing screen

Move the cursor / adjust levels / select from a range of options

Return to the previous menu

ON SCREEN HELP Instructions box - Operation guide

Example (Owner ID):

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ON SCREEN HELP Instructions box - Operation guide - 1

text_image Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN EXIT 0 - 9 PIN entry RETURN

Operation guide will help you.

Auto power standby function ■

● The TV will automatically go to Standby mode in the following conditions:
no signal is received and no operation is performed for 30 minutes in Analogue TV mode.
"Off Timer" is active in the Setup Menu (p. 19)•
no operation is performed for the period selected in "Auto Standby" (p. 36)
- This function does not affect the recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording and One Touch Recording.

Basic Connection

External equipment and cables shown are not supplied with this TV.

Please ensure that the unit is disconnected from the mains socket before attaching or disconnecting any leads.

When disconnecting the mains lead, be absolutely sure to disconnect the mains plug at the socket outlet first.

Example 1

Connecting dish or aerial

TV only
The freesat channel uses Astra 2 at 28.2° East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5° East satellites. To ensure your satellite dish is correctly installed please consult your freesat registered dealer.
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Connecting dish or aerial - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz"] --> B["Rear of the TV"]
    B --> C["SATELLITE"]
    C --> D["For digital satellite broadcasts"]
    D --> E["Satellite cable"]
    E --> F["Satellite dish"]
    G["Clamper"] --> H["Bundle the cables"]
    H --> I["hooks"]
    H --> J["Set the tip in the hooks"]
    K["To loosen:"] --> L["knob"]
    L --> M["① Keep pushing the knob"]
    N["To remove from the TV"] --> O["snaps"]
    O --> P["② Keep pushing both side snaps"]
    Q["Attach the clamper:"] --> R["Insert the clamper in a hole"]
    R --> S["hole"]
    T["RF cable"] --> U["Aerial input terminal"]
    U --> V["Aerial audio output"]
    W["Terrestrial aerial"] --> X["For digital terrestrial and analogue broadcasts"]

Do not bundle the Satellite cable, RF cable and mains lead together (could cause distorted image).

Fix cables with clampers as necessary.

When using the optional accessory, follow the option's assembly manual to fix cables.

Example 2

Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR

text_image Rear of the TV AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz Mains lead Mains lead Aerial input terminal HDMI 1 HDMI HDMI 3 HDMI 2 (ARC) DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN COMPONENT AV1 AV2 Fully wired HDMI compliant cable Fully wired SCART cable RF cable HDMI AV DVD Recorder or VCR RF OUT RF IN RF cable Terrestrial aerial

Example 3

Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable TV box

TV, DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable TV box - 1

text_image Rear of the TV AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz Terrestrial aerial Fully wired HDMI compliant cable Aerial input terminal HDMI HVDC HDMI Fully wired SCART cable RF cable AV 2 AV 1 HDMI DVD Recorder or VCR Cable TV box RF OUT RF IN RF cable RF cable

Note

Connect to the TV's AV2 for a DVD Recorder / VCR supporting Q-Link (p. 86).

Connect to the TV's AV1 for a Cable TV box.

  • For HDMI-compatible equipment, it is possible to connect to HDMI terminals (HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4) by using HDMI cable (p. 92).
    ● Network connection

Q-Link connection p. 84

●VIERA84irakdnconnection
- Please also read the manual of the equipment being connected.

Auto Setup

Search and store TV channels automatically.

These steps are not necessary if the setup has been completed by your local dealer.

- Please complete connections (p. 10 and p. 11) and settings (if necessary) of the connected equipment before starting Auto Setup. For details of settings for the connected equipment, read the appropriate manual.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Auto Setup - 1

natural_image Illustration of a flat-screen monitor with a cable and a numbered label (1) pointing to its side, no text or symbols on the screen itself.

Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On

(Takes a few seconds to be displayed)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 1

If the red LED shows on the TV, press the Standby On / Off switch on the remote control for at least 1 second to turn the TV On.

Auto Setup will start to search for TV channels and store them in the numbered order as specified by the broadcasters.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 2

text_image Panasonic TV i EXIT OK BACK RETURN 1 2 abcdef 3 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 8 tuvqrs 9 wxyz 0

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 3

text_image freesat Auto Setup Parameters Signal Quality 2 Signal Strength 0 DV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found, creating channellet

If "freesat Auto Setup" cannot be done completely

→ "FAQs" (p. 99)

(freesat tuning)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 5

text_image Auto Setup - DVB and Analogue DVB Basin CH 21 Anacama-Scan CH 21 This was take about 6 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 C8BC Channel Free TV 10 62 RBD Radio Wales Free TV 10 62 E4 Free TV 10 62 Carfoot Now Free TV 10 39 Analogue - 33 RBS1 Analogue: 2 Free TV: 8 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0 Soatching

Actual number of channels may differ due to channel duplication.

(DVB and Analogue tuning)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 7

If Q-Link, or similar technology (p. 86), compatible recorder with analogue tuner is connected, analogue channel setting is automatically downloaded to the recorder. (Digital channel setting is not downloaded.)

- If downloading has failed, you can download later through the Setup Menu.

→ "Q-Link Download" (p. 34)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On - 8

Enter your postcode

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Enter your postcode - 1

text_image Enter Postcode for local channels including space Postcode A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U Y W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T I 9 F 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

- Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order. Please ensure to include a space when entering your postcode.

- If you skip this step, the default postcode (central London) will be set.

■How to enter the postcode

Set characters one by one

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to enter the postcode - 1

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to enter the postcode - 2

Exit to go to next step

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to enter the postcode - 3

green

Setup the wireless LAN connection

Setup the wireless LAN connection to enable the network service functions (p. 74).

(If you do not wish to use wireless LAN connection or the network service functions, skip this step.)

- To setup the wireless LAN connection, the Wireless LAN Adaptor (optional accessory) is required. For the information about the Wireless LAN Adaptor “Optional accessories” (p. 6)

- Confirm the encryption key, settings and positions of your access point before starting setup. For details, read the manual of the access point.

Please note that this TV does not support wireless public access points.

● To use a LAN cable instead of the Wireless LAN Adaptor → p. 77

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setup the wireless LAN connection - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start wireless LAN connection setup?"] --> B{Connect to the Wireless LAN Adaptor to the USB 1 or 2 port}
    B --> C["Internet environment"]
    C --> D["Access point"]
    D --> E["Wireless LAN Adaptor (optional accessory)"]
    E --> F["USB2"]
    G["You can setup the wireless LAN connection later"] --> H[""Network Setup" (p. 78)"]
    H --> I["To skip this step"]
    I --> J["EXIT or select 'No'"]
    K["OK"] --> L["② select "Yes""]
    L --> M["③ access"]

Wireless LAN connection setup starts

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Wireless LAN connection setup starts - 1

Select the connection type

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Wireless LAN connection setup starts - 2

- If your access point supports WPS (Push button), then select this option. If not, select "Search for access point".

■WPS(Push button)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■WPS(Push button) - 1

text_image WPS(Push button) 1) Please press the 'WPS' button on the access point until its light flashes. 2) When light is flashing select 'Connect' on TV. If you are unsure, please check the instruction manual of the access point. Connect

Press the WPS button on the access point until the light flashes. And then, press the OK button to connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor and the access point.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■WPS(Push button) - 2

- Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup. - WPS: Wi-Fi Protected Setup

■Search for access point

Access points found automatically are listed.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 1

Select your desired access point

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 3

text_image To search access points again For the information of the highlighted access point To set manually (p. 79) → yellow → i → red

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 4

text_image Encryption Key Setting Connection will be made with the following settings:- SSID : Access Point A Authentication type : WPA-PSK Encryption type : TKIP Please input the encryption key. Encryption key

- : Encrypted access point - To Access the encryption key input mode

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 5

- If the selected access point is not encrypted, the confirmation screen will be displayed. It is recommended to select the encrypted access point.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 6

text_image Access Point Settings Encryption key A D C D L G H I J K L V N O P Q R S T B F W X V Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z r e r v v w x y z

Enter the encryption key of the access point

Set characters one by one

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 8

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons. - "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

Select "Yes"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 9

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 10

●To re-enter the encryption key, select "No".

  • If the connection has failed, check the encryption key, settings and positions of your access point. And then, follow the on screen instructions.
  • If connection to the access point is successful, we recommend you perform the "Connection Test" to confirm connection to the internet has been made. The "Connection Test" can be found in the Network Setup menu (p. 78).

Exit to go to the next step

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Search for access point - 11

(continued to the next page)

Auto Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Auto Setup - 1

Input Owner ID

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Input Owner ID - 1

Please enter your own choice of PIN number, name, etc. to help the police to crack crime.

Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it. The PIN number cannot be reset.

- You can input or change the Owner ID later. "Owner ID" (p. 56)

To skip this step → EXIT

This step will be skipped in the Auto Setup after "Shipping Condition" (p. 51) is performed.

How to input Owner ID ■

① Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 2
0

Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.

② Enter your name, house number, and postcode, in that order Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Enter your name, house number, and postcode, in that order Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Enter your name, house number, and postcode, in that order Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Enter your name, house number, and postcode, in that order Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) - 3

Set characters one by one

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set characters one by one - 1

text_image User input NAME: A S C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n p q r s t u v w x y z < / | - | * _ _ B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set characters one by one - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set characters one by one - 3

Return to select other items

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set characters one by one - 4

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

- Select the next item and repeat the operations.

③ Exit to go to next step

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ③ Exit to go to next step - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ③ Exit to go to next step - 2

Select "Home"

Select "Home" viewing environment (highlight "Home" in yellow) to use in your home environment.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Home" - 1

text_image Please select your viewing environment. Home ↓ OK ① select ② set

Auto Setup is now complete and your TV is ready for viewing.
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Home" - 2

natural_image Illustration of two people at a podium, one holding a phone and the other reviewing documents (no text or symbols visible)

To check channel list at-a-glance
→ "Using TV Guide" (p. 20)
To edit or hide (skip) channels ●
→ "Tuning and Editing Channels" (p. 42 - 47)
If tuning has failed, check the connection of the
Satellite cable, RF cable, and then, follow the on screen instructions.

"Shop" viewing environment ■ (for shop display only)

"Shop" viewing environment is the demonstration mode to explain main features of this TV.

Select "Home" viewing environment to use in your home environment.

  • You can return to viewing environment selection screen at the stage of Shop confirmation screen and Automatic Demo Off / On selection screen.
    ① Return to viewing environment selection screen

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Home" viewing environment to use in your home environment. - 1
BACK RETURN

② Select "Home"
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Home" viewing environment to use in your home environment. - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Home" viewing environment to use in your home environment. - 3

Auto Setup is complete

To change viewing environment later on, you will need to initialise all settings by accessing Shipping Condition.

→ "Shipping Condition" (p. 51)

Note

  • If tuning has failed or to retune all channels "Auto Setup" (p. 40 and p. 41)
  • If you wish to tune in other satellite channels "Auto Setup" in "Other Sat. Tuning Menu" (p. 49)
    ● To re-initialise all settings → “Shipping Condition” (p. 51)
  • If you turned the TV Off during Standby mode last time, the TV will be in Standby mode when you turn the TV On with Mains power On / Off switch.

If you connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor later on, the confirmation screen will be displayed for the setup.

● To setup the Wireless LAN connection → p. 78 and p. 79

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 1

Watching TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Watching TV - 1

text_image Turn power on (Press for about 1 second) ● Mains power On / Off switch should be On. (p. 9) Select the mode (freesat, DVB, Analogue or Other Sat.) TV ②watch #select Displayed if Other Satellite channels are tuned (p. 49) ● Also possible by pressing the TV button repeatedly on the remote control or side panel of the TV. (p. 9) Information banner appears whenever you select a channel ● For details ➔ p. 17 Select a channel up down or freesat channel position numbers run in the ranges 100 - 999 and 0100 - 0999. ● To select a three-digit channel position number, e.g. 133 → 1 → 3 def → 3 def ● To select a four-digit channel position number, e.g. 0246 → 0 → 2 abc → 4 ghi → 6 mio DVB and Other Sat. channel position numbers run from 1 onwards. Analogue channel position numbers run in the ranges 0 - 99. ● To select a two or three-digit channel position number, e.g. 39 → 3 def → 9 eng Note ● To watch pay-TV → "Using Common Interface" (p. 57)

■Select a channel using Information banner (p. 17)

It is possible to confirm the channel name and programme information by using the Information banner before changing channels.

Display Information banner if it is not displayed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using Information banner (p. 17) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using Information banner (p. 17) - 2

While the banner is displayed, select the channel

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using Information banner (p. 17) - 3

- Possible to set display timeout in "Banner Display Timeout" (p. 35).

■Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 20)

It is possible to confirm the channel and programme information by using the TV Guide (EPG) before changing channels.

Display TV Guide

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 20) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 20) - 2

Select a current programme or channel

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 20) - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 20) - 4

Select "View" (DVB mode)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 20) - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 20) - 6

● To use Timer Programming → p. 22

■ Other useful functions

Hold

Freeze / unfreeze picture

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Freeze / unfreeze picture - 1

Display Information banner

Display Information banner

● Also appears when changing a channel

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display Information banner - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display Information banner - 2

text_image Information banner pears when changing a channel TV mode Channel position and name Example (freesat): Coronation Street Also in 19:30 - 20:00 Mute Encrypted Programme Start / Finish time Radio 19:35 freesat Channel List Now ▶ For info press i STTLAD TEXT Multi Audio 45 Same programme available as HD broadcast ● For details, display the extra information → i Current time

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display Information banner - 3

text_image "All DVB Channels" or "Favourites1-4" (p. 45) ● To switch → blue Example (DVB): D 103 ITV Wales Radio 19:35 All DVB Channels Coronation Street Also in Select favourites 19:30 - 20:00 For info press Mute Encrypted AD STTL TEXT Multi Audio 45

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display Information banner - 4

text_image Example (Analogue): A 3 ITV 19:35 All Analogue Channels itv1 CH23 Mute TEXT NICAM 45

Channel number

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display Information banner - 5

text_image "All Other Sat. Channels" or "Favourites1-4" (p. 50) To switch → blue Example (Other Sat.): S 103 ITV Wales Radio 19:35 All Other Sat. Channels Coronation Street Select favourites 19:30 - 20:00 Now ▶ For info press Mute Encrypted STTL TEXT Multi Audio 45

● To confirm another tuned channel name

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display Information banner - 6

● Information on the next programme → (freesat, DVB, Other sat.)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display Information banner - 7

- Extra information → i (press again to hide the banner) (freesat, DVB, Other sat.)

- "AD", "STTL", "TEXT", "Multi Audio" indications are displayed as available on particular programmes, but may not be available for all individual programmes being broadcast. Display the extra information to confirm availability of these functions.

Features available / Message meanings

Mute

Sound mute On

Bad signal

Poor TV signal quality

Encrypted

Scrambled programme

Audio Description service available

- This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an additional audio track to describe events on-screen.

● For settings → p. 33

STTL

Subtitle service available

TEXT

Teletext service available

Multi Audio

Multiple audio available

Stereo, Mono, NICAM

Audio mode

1 - 90

Off Timer remaining time

● For settings → p. 19

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - - 90 - 1

text_image To watch the channel listed in the banner → OK To hide → EXIT

- To set display timeout → "Banner Display Timeout" (p. 35)

Example:
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - - 90 - 2

text_image 103 ITV Wales Coronation Street 19:30 - 20:00 Now ▶ [AD] AD Exet Info 1 19:35 freeset Channel List

Watching TV

■Other useful functions

Display subtitles

freesat, DVB or Other Sat. mode

Display / hide subtitles (if available)

To change the language for DVB (if available)

→ "Preferred Subtitles" (p. 35)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display / hide subtitles (if available) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display / hide subtitles (if available) - 2

Analogue mode

Display subtitles

To hide subtitles

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display subtitles - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display subtitles - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display subtitles - 3

Note

This is the same as switching to Analogue teletext service and selecting "P888" (subtitle service). (p. 27) You cannot change the channel when this function is active.

Aspect

Change the aspect ratio (image size)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the aspect ratio (image size) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the aspect ratio (image size) - 2

Enjoy viewing the image at its optimum size and aspect.

Programmes usually contain an Aspect Control Signal (Widescreen signal, etc.), and the TV will choose the aspect ratio automatically according to the Aspect Control Signal (p. 94).

If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually

Display Aspect Selection list While the list is displayed, select the mode

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 2
Aspect Selection list

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 4

To change the mode using the ASPECT button only

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 5

ASPECT (Press repeatedly until you reach the desired mode)

Auto
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 6

The best ratio is chosen and the image expanded to fill the screen. For details p. 94

16:9
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 7

Directly displays the image at 16:9 without distortion (anamorphic).

14:9
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 8

Displays the image at the standard 14:9 without distortion.

4:3
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 9

Displays the image at the standard 4:3 without distortion.

Zoom1
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 10

Displays a 16:9 letterbox or 4:3 image without distortion.

Zoom2
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 11

Displays a 16:9 letterbox (anamorphic) image full-screen without distortion.

Zoom3
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually - 12

Displays a 2.35:1 letterbox (anamorphic) image full-screen without distortion.

At 16:9, displays the image at its maximum (with slight enlargement).

Note

Aspect is fixed to "16:9" when "Viewing Mode" is set to "Game" in the Picture Menu.

  • Only "16:9" and "4:3" are available in PC input mode.
    ● Not available when the subtitle function is active.
  • Not available in teletext service.
    ● Aspect mode can be memorized separately for SD (Standard definition) and HD (High definition) signals.

Display the selectable settings for the current status

Check or change the current status instantly

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Check or change the current status instantly - 1

To change
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Check or change the current status instantly - 2

Multi Audio / AD (freesat mode)

Allows you to select between alternative language or Audio Description for sound tracks (if available) Set Audio Description "Auto" in the Sound Menu (p. 33) to select the audio description sound track. In freesat mode, Audio Description cannot be controlled separately from the audio description sound track. This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current program.

Multi Audio (DVB or Other Sat. mode)

Allows you to select between alternative language for sound tracks (if available) This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.

Monaural Audio (DVB mode)

Allows you to select stereo / monaural (if available) This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.

Subtitle Language

(freesat, DVB or Other Sat. mode) Allows you to select the language in which subtitles should appear (if available) This setting is not memorized and it will return ● to the default setting once you exit the current programme.

NICAM (Analogue mode)

Switches NICAM sound (if available) → Sound Menu (p. 33)

Volume Correction

Adjusts volume of individual channel or input mode

Audio Description (DVB mode)

Set to "Auto" if the programme has Audio Description service, then you will hear an additional audio track to describe events on screen To adjust the volume for Audio Description ● → "Audio Description Menu" (p. 33)

Safely remove USB

Takes this operation to remove the connected USB device safely from the TV.

Last view

Switch to previously viewed channel or input mode easily

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Switch to previously viewed channel or input mode easily - 1

Press again to return to the present view.

Note

  • Switching channel is not available while the recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording is in progress.
    ● Watching less than 10 sec. is not regarded as the previously viewed channel or input mode.

Off Timer

Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes)

Display the menu Select "Setup"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes) - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes) - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes) - 4

Select "Off Timer" and set the time

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes) - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes) - 6

text_image Setup Menu Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock FreeSat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes) - 7

  • To cancel → Set to "Off" or turn the TV off.
    ● To display the remaining time → Information banner (p. 17)

Note

- When the remaining time is within 3 minutes, the remaining time will flash on the screen.

Using TV Guide

TV Guide—Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) provides an on screen listing of the programmes currently broadcast and the forthcoming broadcasts over the next seven days (depending on the broadcasters).

- When this TV is turned on for the first time, or the TV is switched off for more than a week, it may take some time before the TV Guide is completely shown.

freesat mode

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat mode - 1

text_image INPUT TV EXIT i GUIDE OK OPTION BACK/ RETURN

■To return to TV
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat mode - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat mode - 3

Select freesat

→ p. 16

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select freesat - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select freesat - 2

Display the Channel Genre selection list

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display the Channel Genre selection list - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display the Channel Genre selection list - 2

Select the genre and view TV Guide

Example:

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the genre and view TV Guide - 1

text_image Channel Cervia Selection All Channels Entertainment News & Sport Music Language Music Children Space Interest Radio Shopping Carving & Dosing Interactive Regional Favorites

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the genre and view TV Guide - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the genre and view TV Guide - 3

text_image Example: Programme Current date and time TV Guide date TV Guide time Channel position and name 1 BBC ONE Also in 20:08 - 20:30 DIY SOS : We open in the Bettsbye Time: 19:30 20:00 20:30 21:31:05 101 BBC ONE Ezzander DIY SBC The Bill Red Can 102 BBC 2W Hot Wars Holiday Program 103 BBC NEWS Emmental Donation Street The Bill Charina 104 BBCI 10 O' clock News BBC Peas Cher Good bye 105 BBC THRE Panorama Spring Watch Coats 106 BBC FOUR I'm A Celebrity Pop Idol News Shop 107 BBC Radio Rugby 5 To 1 The Bill Sports Select channel Info EXIT Select programme View / Timer Prop. RETURN -24 hours +24 hours Search Channel Genre

Some programmes may also be broadcast in HD
- You can select HD or SD broadcast before viewing or setting Timer Programming.

■To watch the programme

Select a current programme or channel

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 1

Select "View"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 4
● To use Timer Programming → p. 22

- If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts, the "View Options" screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 6

■To view a channel list of the selected genre

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To view a channel list of the selected genre - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To view a channel list of the selected genre - 2

(Channel Genre list)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To view a channel list of the selected genre - 3
● To list favourite channels → p. 43

■To the previous day

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To the previous day - 1

■To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes - 1

Search
Search Titles...
Movie
News and Factual
Entertainment
Sport
Children's
:

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes - 3

■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes - 2

text_image Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual Entertainment Sport Children's

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes - 3

text_image (Search list) ①select "Search Titles..." ②access

Set characters one by one (maximum: 19 characters)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes - 5

You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

● All the programme titles including the word you set will be listed.
- Searching without any characters will list all programmes including current programmes.

DVB or Analogue mode

This TV supports the GUIDE Plus+ system.

● The Gemstar branding partner will supply the rating informations in the programme information and the recommended group in the Search list.
- DVB and Analogue channels are displayed on the same TV Guide screen. "D" means DVB channel and "A" means Analogue channel. There will be no programme listings for Analogue channels.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue mode - 1

text_image INPUT TV i EXIT GUIDE OK OPTION BACK' RETURN 1 2

■To return to TV
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue mode - 2

Select DVB or Analogue

→ p. 16

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select DVB or Analogue - 1

View TV Guide

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - View TV Guide - 1

text_image Current date and time Example: TV Guide date Programme Logo Gem Preview Wed 28 Oct 2008 10:48 TV Guide Search All Channels Also in Time: 19:30 25:00 20:30 21:00 TV Guide time VIESA 1 BBC ONE Easterster DIY SOS Holiday News Advertisement 7 BBC THREE Hot Wars Holiday Program 14 E4 Emperial Coronation Street The Bill 73 BBC FOUR 10 D' clock News RBC Pepal Chat. Good bye 72 BBC 2W Panorama Spring watch Coast 1/6 BBC1 I'm A Celebrity Pos Idol News D: DVB A: Analogue 719 BBC Red Rugby IS To 1 Sports Select channel i Exit Info RETURN Page up Select programme Hi: 10KN Email Select Alert Page down -24 hours -24 hours Search Category

Channel position and name

- Some programmes may also be broadcast in HD - You can select HD or SD broadcast before viewing or setting Timer Programming.

■To watch the programme

Select a current programme or channel

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 1

Select "View" (DVB mode)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 4

● To use Timer Programming → p. 22

- If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts, the "View Options" screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast. (DVB mode)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To watch the programme - 6

■To view a channel list of the selected category

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To view a channel list of the selected category - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To view a channel list of the selected category - 2

text_image Category All Channels All Channels All DVB Channels All Analogue Channels Free DVB Channels TV/Data DVB Channels Favourites1 Favourites2 Favourites3 Favourites4 (Category list) Only Analogue channels are listed ①select category ②view To list favourite channels → p. 45

■To the previous day (DVB mode)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To the previous day (DVB mode) - 1

■To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes (DVB mode)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes (DVB mode) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes (DVB mode) - 2

text_image Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual Entertainment Sport Children's ( Search list) ①select type OK ②view

■To the next day (DVB mode)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To the next day (DVB mode) - 1

■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes (DVB mode)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes (DVB mode) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes (DVB mode) - 2

text_image Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual Entertainment Sport Children's ( Search list) ①select "Search Titles..." ②access

Set characters one by one (maximum: 19 characters) ① select ② set Search green You can set characters by using numeric buttons. "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

● All the programme titles including the word you set will be listed.
- Searching without any characters will list all programmes including current programmes.

Using TV Guide

■Other useful functions

Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode)

Timer Programming can remind you to watch a programme or record one on an external recorder or a USB HDD.

Select the forthcoming programme
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 1

Select the function
(Ext Rec., USB HDD Rec. or Reminder)
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 2

text_image Timer Programming Wed 28 Oct 2009 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End #1 BDC ONE #1 DIY SOS Wed 28 Oct 20-30 [20:30] [30 min] ... ... -/- (-min) ... ... -/- (-min) ... ... -/- (-min) ... ... -/- (-min)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 3
(Timer Programming screen)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 4

natural_image Illustration of a monitor connected to a device via cable (no text or symbols visible)

LED
LED will turn to orange if Timer Programming is set. (Orange LED will flash if the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.)

Ext Rec. /

USB HDD Rec.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 5
: to record the programme to the external recorder (Ext Rec.) or the USB HDD (USB HDD Rec.)
When the start time comes, the channel will be switched automatically and the video and audio signals will be output. 2 mins. before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.

Reminder

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 6
: to remind you to watch the programme
When you are watching TV, a reminder message appears 2 mins. before the start time. Press the OK button to switch to the programmed channel.
■To check / change / cancel a timer programming event → "Timer Programming" (p. 53)

■To return to TV Guide → RETURN

■If you select a current programme

A confirmation screen asking whether you wish to watch or record the programme will appear. Select "Timer Programming" and set "Ext Rec." or "USB HDD Rec." to record from the time you finish programming the timer event setting.
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 8
■If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts

The "Timer Options" screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast.
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 9

text_image Timer Options DIY SOS 101 BBC ONE 19:30-20:00 Wed 28 Oct 2009 119 BBC HD 19:30-20:00 Wed 28 Oct 2009 ②set ①select
Timer Programming Wed 28 Oct 2009 10:46
FunctionNo. Channel NameDateStart End
( )1BNC ONE DUT SDBWed 28 Oct20-35 [20-30] [30 min.]
......~[ ~]
......~[ ~]
......~[ ~]
......~[ ~]
......~[ ~]

(Timer Programming screen)
“HD” will be displayed if HD broadcast is set.

Note

● This function is not available in Analogue mode.

- Timer Programming can store up to 15 events.

- Timer Programming reminder messages will remain displayed until one of the following occurs:

- You press the OK button to view the programme or the EXIT button to cancel the reminder.

- The timer programming event that the reminder is set for ends.

- No other channel can be selected while the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.

- When recording programmes, be sure to make the proper settings on the recorder connected to the TV. If a compatible recorder with Q-Link or similar technologies is connected to the TV (p. 86) and the “Link Settings” (p. 34) are completed, no setting of the recorder is required. Also read the manual of the recorder.

- When recording programmes to the USB HDD, be sure to register the USB HDD and enable it for recording in the "USB HDD Setup" (p. 62).

Guide link programming is Timer Programming which is controlled by information from the TV Guide; if programme start and end times are changed by the broadcaster, the timer programming event will follow the change.

A Split Programme programming is a Guide link programming which is interrupted by one or more other programmes.

Note that Guide link programming (including Split Programme programming) only works reliably if correct information is received from broadcasters.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Guide link programming (Timer Programming from the TV Guide signal) - 1

text_image Timer Programming Wed 28 Oct 2009 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End Ext Rec. 1 BBC ONE Wed 28 Oct 20:00 28:30 DIY SOS (30 min.) Reminder 14 E4 Wed 28 Oct 21:00 22:30 (The BIII (90 min.) Ext Rec. 72 BBC 2W Wed 28 Oct 22:45 23:00 (15 min.) Ext Rec. 1 BBC ONE Thu 28 Oct 10:30 11:30 Red Cap (80 min.) ... ... -/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- +/- + / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / - / ... ... -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

(Timer Programming screen)

"Guide" is displayed if the timer is set from the TV Guide (Guide link programming)

"S/P" is displayed if the timer is set from the TV Guide and the programme is a Split Programme

“💡” or “💡” will be displayed in the TV Guide if Timer Programming is set as the Guide link programming.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Guide link programming (Timer Programming from the TV Guide signal) - 2

text_image Frontier GUE Wed 28 Oct 2009 10:46 VIEFA 1 BBC CNF 20:00 - 30:30 D/W SDS: We own in the Ballersays Time 15:30 20:00 23:30 21:00 1 BBC CNF 17 BBC THREE 14 E4 70 BBC FOUR 72 BBC 2W 15 BBC 71 BBC Red Esterler DH CBS Holdt News Hot Wars Holiday Program Emirness Correlation Street The BI 10 C' clock News BBC Pop: Char. Gne bye Ponionsa Sorting watch Coast I'm A Celebrity Pro tool News Rugby 15 To 1 Sports

Note

  • If you edit the start time or end time of a Guide link programming event by more than 10 minutes, it will no longer follow the broadcaster's changes to the start or end time. The start and end times will become fixed.
  • Whilst making the Split Programme programming event for Ext Rec. or USB HDD Rec., you cannot record any channels between the interrupted programmes.
    ● The Split Programme programming event for Reminder will be cleared by pressing the OK button once to view.
    ● The Split Programme programming event for Reminder will switch to the programmed channel by pressing the OK button even if it is between the interrupted programmes.
    ● The Split Programme programming does not work if the separated parts are broadcast on different channels.

View details of the programme (freesat or DVB mode)

Select the programme View details

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the programme View details - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the programme View details - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the programme View details - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the programme View details - 4

text_image VIEFA Details
  • Press again to return to TV Guide.

View advertisement (DVB or Analogue mode)

Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time

→ "Postcode" in "GUIDE Plus+ Settings" (p. 36)

If you have already entered your postcode in "Auto Setup" - when first using the TV (p. 12), you do not have to enter it again.

If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcode is entered, advertisements may not be displayed correctly.

Display advertisement information

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display advertisement information - 1

- To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the information. To update the information continuously, the TV must be left in Standby mode at night.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display advertisement information - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["■To change advertisements"] --> B["OK"]
    C["■To return to TV Guide"] --> D["OPTION or BACK/RETURN"]

Note

  • Some advertisements are for future programmes.
    In this case it is possible to use the Guide link programming function (above).
  • The advertisements displayed on the TV Guide are sent from the GUIDE Plus+ system so that they cannot be deleted manually or will not be lost even when the TV is turned Off with Mains power On / Off switch.

Using TV Guide

Other Sat. mode

In Other Sat. mode, TV Guide is not available. In stead, Channel List will appear.

● To tune in Other Sat. Channels → p. 49

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Other Sat. mode - 1

text_image 1 Select Other Sat. → p. 16 TV 2 Display the Channel List GUIDE 3 Select the channel ②watch OK ①select Panasonic TV To return to TV ■ EXIT or GUIDE

Viewing Teletext

You can enjoy news, weather forecasts and subtitles, etc. (depending on the broadcaster)

● The availability of teletext services for a programme is indicated by "TEXT" in the information banner.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Viewing Teletext - 1

text_image 0:1 BBC ONE Wales Coronation Street 19:30 - 20:00 20:35 At EVE Channels Select favourites For info press TEXT

Information banner (p. 17)
Displayed if programme has teletext service

Digital teletext (MHEG)

Digital teletext services

Digital teletext services differ greatly from analogue teletext.

When you switch to a digital teletext service, the images you see can contain graphics and text, laid out and controlled in a manner decided by the broadcaster.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Digital teletext services - 1

text_image INPUT TV 1 2 3 BACKI RETURN TEXT 1 2 abcdef 3 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 8 tuvpqrs 9 wyz 0 Panasonic TV

Select freesat or DVB

→ p. 16

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select freesat or DVB - 1

freesat and DVB programmes have digital teletext services (MHEG).

Switch to Teletext

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Switch to Teletext - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Switch to Teletext - 2

text_image 17:51 28 Feb

How to use

In all cases, it is possible to navigate the pages using buttons on the remote control, but because the commands available must apply to all manufacturers of digital equipment, some on screen commands may not correspond exactly to the remote control buttons.

For example:

When "select" or "go" is displayed OK

- When “◀”, “▶”, “▲”, “▼” symbol is displayed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to use - 1

- When "back key" is displayed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to use - 2

- When the key words are displayed on colour bar

red green yellow blue

- When options with numbers are displayed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to use - 3

■To return to TV → TEXT

Note

- As soon as you switch to a digital channel with links to a teletext service, software is downloaded in the background to enable the teletext function. This means that when switching to a digital channel, you should wait for approximately 5 seconds before pressing the TEXT button - this will allow the software to download. If you press the TEXT button before download is complete, it will be ignored and you will have to press the TEXT button again when the download is complete.

● While navigating digital teletext, you will find there is a short delay when moving between pages while the page downloads. There is often a prompt shown somewhere on the page (for example "Loading") to let you know that this is happening.

Viewing Teletext

Analogue teletext

Analogue teletext services

Analogue teletext services are the text information provided by the broadcasters.

The features may vary depending on the broadcasters.

What is FASTEXT mode?

In FASTEXT mode, four differently coloured subjects are situated at the bottom of the screen. To access more information about one of these subjects, press the appropriately coloured button. This facility enables fast access to information on the subjects shown.

What is List mode?

In List mode, four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered and stored in the TV's memory. ("Store frequently viewed pages", p. 27)

■To change mode → "Teletext" in the Setup Menu (p. 35)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - What is List mode? - 1

text_image 1 Select Analogue or Other Sat. p. 16 TV Other Sat. programmes are digital broadcasts. The operations of the teletext services, however, are equal to Analogue teletext service. 2 Switch to Teletext TEXT Displays the index page (content varies depending on the broadcasters) Current page number Sub page number << 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 >> P100 17:51 28 Feb Time / date TELETEXT INFORMATION Colour bar 3 Select the page 1 2 abc 3 c0 4 ghi 5 R 6 wvo 7 abc 8 Lw 9 wvo or up down or red green yellow blue (Corresponds to the colour bar) ■To adjust contrast → MENU (press twice) → As the blue bar is displayed ■To return to TV → EXIT

Reveal hidden data

Reveal hidden words e.g. quiz page answers

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Reveal hidden data - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Reveal hidden data - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Reveal hidden data - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Reveal hidden data - 4

FULL / TOP / BOTTOM

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 4

text_image P100 Broadcast (TOP) (Expand the TOP half)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 8

HOLD

Stop automatic updating

(If you wish to hold the current page without updating)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Stop automatic updating - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Stop automatic updating - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Stop automatic updating - 3

INDEX

Return to the main index page

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Return to the main index page - 1

Subtitles

View a favourite page stored

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - View a favourite page stored - 1

Factory setting is "P888" (subtitle service) on the blue button (List mode).

View in multi window

Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once - 2

Operations can be made only in Teletext screen.

Each time pressed: Teletext TV and Teletext

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once - 3

Store frequently viewed pages

Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar

(List mode only)

As page is displayed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar - 1

Corresponding coloured button

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar - 2

press and hold

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar - 3

If you wish to use Subtitles, do not change number on blue button.

To change stored pages ■

Enter new page number

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To change stored pages ■ - 1

Coloured button you want to change

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To change stored pages ■ - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To change stored pages ■ - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To change stored pages ■ - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To change stored pages ■ - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To change stored pages ■ - 6

View sub page

View sub page (Only when teletext is more than one page)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - View sub page (Only when teletext is more than one page) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - View sub page (Only when teletext is more than one page) - 2

To view specific sub page■

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To view specific sub page■ - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To view specific sub page■ - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To view specific sub page■ - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To view specific sub page■ - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To view specific sub page■ - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To view specific sub page■ - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To view specific sub page■ - 7

Sub pages:

The number of sub pages varies depending on the broadcasters (up to 79 pages). It may take some time for searching, during which time you can watch TV.

Watch TV while waiting for update

View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page

Teletext automatically updates itself when new information becomes available.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["MENU"] --> B["yellow"]
    B --> C["Changes to TV screen temporarily P108"]
    C --> D["Appears when updating is completed"]
    D --> E["View the updated page"]
    E --> F["yellow"]

- The news page provides a function that indicates arrival of latest news ("News Flash").

Watching External inputs

Connect the external equipment (VCRs, DVD equipment, etc.) and you can watch through the AV input.

To connect the equipment ➤ p. 11 and p. 92

The Remote Control is capable of operating some functions of selected external equipment.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Watching External inputs - 1

text_image Turn the TV on When connecting with SCART as example 2 or 3 ■ (p. 11) → Receives input signals automatically when playback starts Input signals are automatically identified by the SCART (pin 8) terminal. This function is also available for HDMI connections (p. 92). If input mode is not switched automatically■ → Perform ②and ③ Check the setup of the equipment. Display the Input select menu AV Select the input mode connected to the equipment Input Selection AV1 AV2/S AV3 COMPONENT PC HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 TV Media Server ①select OK ②watch You can also select the input using the AV button on the remote ● control or the side panel of the TV. Press the button repeatedly until the desired input is selected. ● You cannot select "Media Server" using the AV button on the side panel of the TV. ● In order to switch between AV2 and AV2S, move the indicator by pressing left and right cursor button. ● You can label or skip each input mode → "Input Labels" (p. 55) Skipped inputs will not be displayed when the AV button is pressed. View Displays the selected mode AV2 Panasonic TV

■To return to TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Watching External inputs - 2

Note

  • If the external equipment has an aspect adjustment function, set it to "16:9".
  • For details, see the manual of the equipment or ask your local dealer.

Screen display

TerminalAV1 AV2 AV3COMPONENT PCHDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3HDMI4
Manual input (default setting in “Input Labels”)AV1 AV1-RGBAV2 AV2-S-Video AV2-RGBAV3COMPONENT PCHDMI2 HDMI3HDMI4
Auto input (EC mode or) VIERA LinkEC/AV1 EC/AV1-RGBEC/AV2 EC/AV2-S-Video EC/AV2-RGBEC/HDMI1 Applicable for EC mode and VIERA LinkEC/HDMI2 Applicable for VIERA LinkEC/HDMI3 Applicable for VIERA LinkEC/HDMI4 Applicable for VIERA Link
  • If the above information is permanently displayed on the top left of the screen, press the i button to clear.

Operating the equipment with the TV remote control

The Panasonic equipment connected to the TV can be directly operated with the below buttons of this TV remote control.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 1Selection Switch for operating the connected equipmentSelect “DVD/VCR” to operate Panasonic DVD Recorder, DVD Player, Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or VCR→“How to change the code for the type of the equipment” (see below)Select “TV” to use USB HDD Recording, Media Player or VIERA Link→“USB HDD Recording” (p. 64)→“Media Player” (p. 70)→“VIERA Link Control” (p. 90)
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 2StandbySet to Standby mode / Turn on
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 3PlayPlayback videocassette / DVD / video content
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 4StopStop the operations
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 5Rewind / Skip / SearchVCR: Rewind, view the picture rapidly in reverseDVD / video content: Skip to the previous track or title(not available for the operation of USB HDD Recording)Press and hold to search backward
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 6Fast-forward / Skip / SearchVCR: Fast-forward, view the picture rapidly forwardDVD / video content: Skip to the next track or title(not available for the operation of USB HDD Recording)Press and hold to search forward
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 7PausePause / ResumeDVD: Press and hold to play at slow speed
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 8Channel Up / DownSelect channel
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 9RecordStart recording

■ How to change the code for the type of the equipment

Each type of the Panasonic equipment has its own remote control code.

Please change the code according to the equipment you want to operate.

① Set the position to "DVD/VCR" DVD/VCR TV
② Press and hold ⏻ during the following operations

Enter the appropriate code, see table below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Press

Type of the equipmentCode
DVD Recorder, DVD Player70 (default)
Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre71
VCR72

Note

  • Confirm if the remote control works correctly after changing the code.
    ● The codes may be reset to default values if batteries are replaced.
    ● Some operations may not be possible on some equipment models.

How to Use VIERA TOOLS

You can access some special features easily by using the VIERA TOOLS function.

- For "VIERA Link Control" and "Pause Live TV" functions to operate correctly, ensure the connections and settings are completed.

“Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features” (p. 84 and p. 85), “Preparations” (p. 87) After connection, turn the equipment on and then switch the TV on.
- For "Photo", "Video" and "Music" functions to operate correctly, ensure the device has photo or video data on it and insert it into the SD Card slot or USB port properly.
→ "Using Media Player" (p. 66)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to Use VIERA TOOLS - 1

text_image 1 2 EXIT VIERA TOOLS OK Panasonic TV

■To return to TV
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to Use VIERA TOOLS - 2

Display icons of the feature

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display icons of the feature - 1

Select a feature

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select a feature - 1

text_image VIERA Link Control VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO MUSIC MONITOR

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select a feature - 2

text_image OK ①select ②access

Follow the operations of each feature

VIERA Link Control ➤ "VIERA Link Control" (p. 90)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Follow the operations of each feature - 1

When two or more compatible equipment are connected, a selection screen will be displayed.

Please select the correct description and access.

Pause Live TV • "Pause Live TV" (p. 89)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Follow the operations of each feature - 2

Photo "Photo mode" (p. 68)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Follow the operations of each feature - 3

When two or more available devices are connected, a selection screen will be displayed.

Please select the correct description and access.

Video • "Video mode" (p. 70)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Follow the operations of each feature - 4

When two or more available devices are connected, a selection screen will be displayed.

Please select the correct description and access.

Music "Music mode" (p. 73)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Follow the operations of each feature - 5

When two or more available devices are connected, a selection screen will be displayed.

Please select the correct description and access.

Media Server • "Using DLNA ^ features" (p. 80)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Follow the operations of each feature - 6

Note

If the selected feature is not available, the demonstration to explain how to use it can be displayed. Press the OK button to view the demonstration after selecting the unavailable feature.

How to Use Menu Functions

Various menus allow you to make settings for the picture, sound, and other functions.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to Use Menu Functions - 1

text_image MENU EXIT OK BACK/RETURN Panasonic TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to Use Menu Functions - 2

Display the menu

MENU

● Displays the functions that can be set (varies according to the input signal)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display the menu - 1

Select the menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the menu - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the menu - 2

text_image ① select ② access

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the menu - 3

Select the item

Example (Picture Menu):

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the item - 1

text_image Picture Menu Viewing Mode Dynamic Contrast Brightness Colour Sharpness Tint Colour Balance Warm Vivid Colour Off C.A.T.S. Off

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the item - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the item - 3

Adjust or select

Example (Picture Menu):

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Adjust or select - 1

text_image Picture Menu Viewing Mode Dynamic Contrast Brightness Colour Sharpness Tint Colour Balance Warm Vivid Colour Off C.A.T.S. Off

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Adjust or select - 2

text_image ① change ② store or access (Required by some functions)

■To return to TV at any time

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To return to TV at any time - 1

Choose from among ■ alternatives

Number and positions of alternatives

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Choose from among ■ alternatives - 1

text_image Colour Balance Normal Changed

■To reset the settings

● To reset the picture settings only
→ "Reset to Defaults" in the Picture Menu (p. 32)
● To reset the sound settings only
→ "Reset to Defaults" in the Sound Menu (p. 33)
• To initialize all settings
"Shipping Condition" in the Setup Menu (p. 51)

■To return to the previous screen

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To return to the previous screen - 1

■Adjust using the slide bar

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Adjust using the slide bar - 1

■Go to the next screen

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Go to the next screen - 1

text_image Child Lock Access Displays the next screen

■Enter characters by free input menu

You can enter names or numbers freely for some items.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Enter characters by free input menu - 1

Set characters one by one

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Enter characters by free input menu - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Enter characters by free input menu - 3

Store

BACK/ RETURN

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Enter characters by free input menu - 4

  • You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
    → "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

How to Use Menu Functions

Menu list

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
PictureViewing ModeBasic picture mode (Dynamic / Normal / Cinema / True Cinema / Game / Photo / Professional1 / Professional2)In each Viewing Mode, Contrast, Brightness, Colour, Sharpness, Tint, Colour Balance, Vivid Colour, C.A.T.S., P-NR and 3D-COMB can be adjusted and stored to suit your particular viewing requirement.Set for each input signal.Dynamic : Provides enhanced picture contrast and sharpness when viewing in a bright room.Normal : Recommended for viewing under normal ambient room lighting conditions.Cinema : For watching movies in a darkened room with the improved performance of contrast, black and colour reproductionTrue Cinema: Precisely reproduces the original quality of the image without any revision.Game : Fast response signal specifically to provide suitable images for playing gamesNot valid on TV modeA continuous record of time spent using Game mode can be displayedin the top right of the screen."Playing Time Display" (p. 35)Photo : Set "Reversal Film" to "On" to provide the suitable image quality for photosFor HDMI input, Media Player and Network service operationsProfessional : Allows you to set the professional picture settings in "Advanced Settings", 1/2 "Lock Settings" and "Copy Adjustment"p. 60This mode is available only when "Advance(isfccc)" in the Setup Menu is set to "On".Not valid on VIERA CASTIf the certified professional dealer sets these modes, "Professional1" and "Professional2" may be displayed as "isf Day" and "isf Night".
Contrast, Brightness, Colour, SharpnessIncreases or decreases the levels of these options according to your personal preference
TintWith an NTSC signal source connected to the TV, the picture hue can be adjusted to suit your tasteFor NTSC signal reception only
Colour BalanceAllows you to set the overall colour tone of the picture (Cool / Normal / Warm)Not valid when "Viewing Mode" is set to "True Cinema", "Professional1" or "Professional2".
Vivid ColourAutomatically adjusts colours to vivid ones (Off / On)Not valid on PC signal.Not valid when "Viewing Mode" is set to "Professional1" or "Professional2".
Reversal Film EffectProvides the picture effect such as the reversal film (Off / On)This function is available when "Viewing Mode" is set to "Photo".
C.A.T.S.Contrast Automatic Tracking System (Automatic Brightness Control function)Adjusts picture settings automatically dependent on ambient lighting conditions (Off / On)
P-NRPicture Noise ReductionAutomatically reduces unwanted picture noise and flicker noise in the contoured parts of a picture (Off / Min / Mid / Max)Not valid on PC signal.
3D-COMBMakes still or slow moving pictures look more vivid (Off / On)Occasionally, whilst viewing still or slow moving pictures, colour patterning may be seen. Set to "On" to display sharper and more accurate colours.Not valid on RGB, S-Video, Component, PC, HDMI and Media Player
Picture DisplayTurns the screen off when you select "Off" (Off / On)The sound is active even if the screen turns off.Press any button (except Standby) to turn the screen on.This function is effective in reducing power consumption when listening to the sound without watching the TV screen.
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset the present Picture Viewing Mode to the default settings
SoundModeSelects the basic sound mode (Music / Speech / User)●The selected mode affects all input signals.Music: Improves sound quality for watching music videos, etc.Speech: Improves sound quality for watching news, drama, etc.●In Music and Speech modes, you can adjust “Bass” and “Treble” settings, and those settings will be stored for each mode.User: Adjusts the sounds manually by using the equalizer to suit your favourite sound quality.For the User mode, “Equalizer” will appear on the Sound Menu instead of “Bass” and “Treble”. Select the “Equalizer” and adjust the frequency. ▶“Equalizer” (below)
BassIncreases or decreases level to enhance or minimise lower, deeper sound output
TrebleIncreases or decreases level to enhance or minimise sharper, higher sound output
EqualizerAdjusts the frequency level to suit your favourite sound quality●This function is available when “Mode” is set to “User”.Select the frequency and change the frequency level by using the cursor button.●If you want to enhance the bass sound, raise the level of the lower frequency. If you●want to enhance the treble sound, raise the level of the higher frequency.●To reset the levels of each frequency to the default settings, select the “Reset to Defaults” by using cursor button, and then press the OK button.
BalanceAdjusts volume level of right and left speakers
Headphone VolumeAdjusts the volume of the headphones
SurroundSurround sound settings (Off / V-Audio / V-Audio Surround / V-Audio ProSurround)V-Audio : Provides a dynamic enhancer of width to simulate improved spatial effectsV-Audio Surround : Provides a dynamic enhancer of width and depth to simulate improved spatial effectsV-Audio ProSurround: Provides a more progressive enhancer and reverberation to simulate improved spatial effects.
Volume CorrectionAdjusts the volume of individual channel or input mode
Speaker Distance to WallAdjusts the low frequency sound (Over 30cm / Up to 30cm)●If the gap between the TV and wall is over 30 cm, “Over 30cm” is recommended.If the gap between the TV and wall is within 30 cm, “Up to 30cm” is recommended.●
Preferred Multi AudioSelects the preferred language for digital channel multi audio (depending on the broadcaster) (English / Welsh / Gaelic)
NICAMNear Instantaneous Companded Audio MultiplexReproduces NICAM stereo sound (Off / On)●Off if reception is poor (FM monaural sound)Analogue mode only●
SPDIF SelectionSPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (Auto / PCM)Auto : Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital are output as Dolby Digital Bitstream.MPEG is output as PCM.PCM : Digital output signal is fixed to PCM.●For freesat, DVB, Other Sat., Network video contents (p. 81) or Video mode (p. 70)
MPEG Optical LevelAdjusts the audio level of MPEG output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal as the initial setting (0 / -2 / -4 / -6 / -8 / -10 / -12dB)●Normally, MPEG sound is larger comparing with the other types of audio track.●For freesat, DVB or Other Sat. mode
HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 InputSelect to fit the input signal (Digital / Analogue) (p. 97)Digital : When sound is carried via the HDMI cable connectionAnalogue : When sound is not carried via the HDMI cable connection●HDMI input mode only
Audio DescriptionUseful for visually-impaired viewers (Off / Auto)Set to “Auto” to activate the description sound track if available●The availability of audio description sound track is indicated by “AD” in the information banner (p. 17).●For freesat or DVB mode
VolumeAdjusts the volume for Audio Description●DVB mode only
SpeakersSet to “On” to activate the description sound track from TV speakers (Off / On)●DVB mode only
HeadphonesSet to “On” to activate the description sound track from headphones (Off / On)●DVB mode only
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset the present Sound Mode, Balance, Headphone Volume and Surround to the default settings

A different menu will be displayed when "Advance(isfccc)" in the Setup Menu is set to "On" or in the mode of PC input, Media Player or Network service operations. (p. 59 - 61, 67 - 73 and p. 82)
- Only available items can be selected.

How to Use Menu Functions

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
SetupTimer ProgrammingSets a timer to remind watching or record forthcoming programmes (p. 52)
Off TimerSets the time until the TV automatically goes to Standby mode(Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes)(p. 19)
USB HDD SetupRegister the connected USB HDD and makes the settings for the recording (p. 62)
Link SettingsVIERA LinkSets to use VIERA Link functions (Off / On) (p. 87)
HDMI Content DetectionAdjusts the picture settings according to the content type signal from the connected equipment via HDMI cable (Off / Auto)This function is available if the connected equipment supports HDMI Content Type.The content type information will be displayed for several seconds when this function works.
Q-LinkSelects which AV terminal is to be used for data communication between this TV and a compatible recorder (AV1 / AV2) (p. 86)Select the connected terminal to the recorder even it is not compatible with Q-Link.
AV1 / AV2 outChooses the signal to be transmitted from the TV to Q-Link(TV / AV1 / AV2 / AV3 / Monitor)Monitor: Image displayed on screenComponent, PC and HDMI signals cannot be outputted.
Standby Power SaveControls the power consumption in Standby mode of the connected equipment to reduce the consumption (Off / On) (p. 88)This function is available when “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
Intelligent Auto StandbyMakes non-watched or non-used connected equipment go into Standby mode to reduce the power consumption (Off / On (With reminder) / On (No reminder)) (p. 88)This function is available when “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
Q-Link DownloadDownloads analogue channel information to a Q-Link compatible equipment connected to the TV
Child LockLocks a channel / AV input to prevent access to it (p. 54)
freesat Tuning MenuFavourites EditCreates a list of favourite freesat channels (p. 43)
Channel ListSkips the unwanted freesat channels (p. 43)
Auto SetupAutomatically sets the freesat channels received in the area (p. 40)
Signal ConditionChecks the freesat signal condition (p. 43)
DVB Tuning MenuFavourites EditCreates a list of favourite DVB channels (p. 45)
Channel ListSkips the unwanted DVB channels or edits DVB channels (p. 45)
Auto SetupAutomatically sets the DVB channels received in the area (p. 41)
Channel Sorting by RegionAutomatically sorts tuned channels according to the available region (p. 44)
Manual TuningSets the DVB channels manually (p. 44)
Update Channel ListUpdates DVB Channel List while keeping your settings (p. 46)
New Channel MessageSelects whether to give a notification message when a new DVB channel is found (Off / On) (p. 46)
Signal ConditionChecks the DVB signal condition (p. 46)
SetupAnalogue Tuning MenuChannel ListSkips the unwanted Analogue channels or edits Analogue channels (p. 47)
Auto SetupAutomatically sets the Analogue channels received in the area (p. 41)
Manual TuningSets the Analogue channels manually (p. 47)
Other Sat. Tuning MenuFavourites EditCreates a list of favourite Other Satellite channels (p. 50)
Channel ListSkips the unwanted Other Satellite channels or edits Other Satellite channels (p. 50)
Auto SetupAutomatically sets the Other Satellite channels received in the area (p. 49)
Manual TuningSets the Other Satellite channels manually (p. 48)Please consult the received satellite broadcasting companies for the setting.
Add New ChannelsAdds new Other Satellite channels to Channel List (p. 49)
Signal ConditionChecks the condition of Other Satellite signals (p. 48)
Display SettingsTeletextAnalogue teletext display mode (FASTEXT / List) (p. 26)
Preferred SubtitlesSelects the preferred language for digital channel subtitles (depending on the broadcaster) (English / Welsh / Gaelic)To display subtitles
Input LabelsLabels or skips each input terminal (p. 55)
Banner DisplayTimeoutSets how long the Information banner (p. 17) stays on screen (0 (No display) / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 seconds)
Playing Time DisplaySet to “On” to display a continuous record of time spent using Game mode every 30 mins (Off / On)This function is available when “Game” is selected in “Viewing Mode” (p. 32).
Radio ModeSets the timer for turning off the screen automatically when a radio channel is selected (Off / 5 / 10 / 15 / 20 seconds)The sound is active even if the screen turns off.Press any button (except Volume Up / Down and Sound Mute buttons) to turn the screen on.This function is effective in reducing power consumption when listening to a radio channel.
Network SetupSets the network setting to use in your network environment (p. 76)
DivX® VODDisplays DivX VOD registration code (p. 95)
Advance(isfccc)Enables the advanced picture settings (Off / On)Set to “On” to enable the mode of “Professional1” and “Professional2” in “Viewing Mode”.Set to “On” to display the advanced items in the Picture Menu - “Advanced Settings”, “Lock Settings” and “Copy Adjustment”. “Copy Adjustment” will be displayed when “Viewing Mode” is set to “Professional1” or “Professional2”.“isfccc” is the picture setting for the certified professional dealer. For details, consult your local dealer.
  • A different menu will be displayed when "Advance(isfccc)" in the Setup Menu is set to "On" or in the mode of PC input, Media Player or Network service operations. (p. 59 - 61, 67 - 73 and p. 82) Only available items can be selected.

How to Use Menu Functions

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
SetupSystem MenuUSB Keyboard LayoutSelects the language that your USB Keyboard supportsUse a USB Keyboard to enter characters in VIERA CAST (p. 83).●Characters may not be displayed correctly on the TV screen depending on the ●connected keyboard or the keyboard layout setting.
Shipping ConditionResets all settings, for example, when moving house (p. 51)
Owner IDInputs the owner ID (p. 56)
Common InterfaceUses include to watch pay-TV (p. 57)
System UpdateDownloads new software to TV (p. 58)
Software LicenceDisplays the software licence information
System InformationDisplays the system information of this TV
Other SettingsGUIDE Plus+ SettingsPostcodeSets your postcode to display advertisements in the GUIDE Plus+ system (p. 23)
System InformationDisplays the system information of the GUIDE Plus+ system
Intelligent Frame CreationAutomatically compensates the picture frame rate and removes juddering movements to make the images smooth and clear (Off / Mid / Max)● This function is not available for selection (default to “Off”) when “Viewing Mode” is set to “Game” or in the mode of PC input, photo or Network service operations.
24p Smooth FilmAutomatically compensates the picture frame rate to make the 24p source movie images smooth (Off / Mid / Max)● This is available only for 24p signal input and displayed instead of “Intelligent Frame Creation”.● This function is not available for selection (default to “Off”) when “Viewing Mode” is set to “Game” or in the mode of PC input, photo or Network service operations.
Resolution EnhancerEnhances the picture resolution to make the image sharper (Off / Mid / Max)This function is available for SD (Standard definition) signal.●As for HD (High definition) signal, this function is available when aspect mode is ●set to 16:9 (16:9 Overscan is set to “On”) or Zoom.Not valid on PC, VIERA CAST and Media Player●
Power on PreferenceAutomatically selects the input when the TV is turned on (TV / AV)Set to “TV” to view picture from TV tuner.Set to “AV” to view input from an external equipment connected to a SCART terminal, e.g. cable TV box.● The external equipment must be switched on and sending a control signal for automatic switching at power on to occur.
Power on Channel ListAutomatically selects All Channels or Favourites list in the Information banner (p. 17) when the TV is turned on (All Channel List / Last)Set to “All Channel List” to display all the channels.Set to “Last” to display the one you selected last time.● Not available on freesat or analogue mode
Auto StandbySets the time the TV automatically goes to Standby mode when no operation is performed for the selected times (Off / 2 / 4 hours)● Starting Timer Programming automatically does not affect this function.Automatic input switching with the connected equipment affects this function and ●time-count will be reset.● The notification message will appear 3 minutes before going to Standby mode.
Power SaveReduces brightness of picture to economise on power consumption (Off / On)
16:9 OverscanSelects the screen area displaying the image (Off / On)On : Enlarges the image to hide the edge of the image.Off : Displays the image in the original size.● Set to “On” if noise is generated on the edge of the screen.This function is available when aspect is set to Auto (16:9 signal only) or 16:9.●This function can be memorized separately for SD (Standard definition) and HD ●(High definition) signals.
DVI Input SettingChanges the black level in the image for HDMI input mode with DVI input signal manually (Normal / Full)● When the DVI input signal from the external equipment, especially from PC, is displayed, the black level may not be suitable. In this case, select “Full”.● The black level for HDMI input signal will be adjusted automatically.For HDMI input mode with DVI input signal only●
  • A different menu will be displayed when “Advance(isfccc)” in the Setup Menu is set to “On” or in the mode of PC input, Media Player or Network service operations. (p. 59 - 61, 67 - 73 and p. 82) Only available items can be selected.
  • If “Demo Settings” item is displayed in the Setup Menu, the TV is in “Shop” viewing environment. To return to “Home” viewing environment initialise all settings by accessing Shipping Condition.
    → "Shipping Condition" (p. 51)

Overview ■ (Picture, Sound)

How to operate p. 31

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Overview ■ (Picture, Sound) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["VIEWA Main Menu"] --> B["Picture"]
    A --> C["Sound"]
    A --> D["Setup"]
    B --> E["Picture Menu 1/2"]
    B --> F["Picture Menu 2/2"]
    E --> G["Viewing Mode"]
    E --> H["Contrast"]
    E --> I["Brightness"]
    E --> J["Colour"]
    E --> K["Sharpness"]
    E --> L["Tint"]
    E --> M["Colour Balance"]
    E --> N["Vivid Colour"]
    E --> O["Reversal Film Effect"]
    F --> P["C.A.T.S."]
    F --> Q["P-NR"]
    F --> R["3D-COMB"]
    F --> S["Picture Display"]
    F --> T["Reset to Defaults"]
    F --> U["On"]
    F --> V["Reset"]

    E --> W["Available in NTSC"]
    E --> X["Not available when &quot;Viewing Mode&quot; is set to &quot;True Cinema&quot; or &quot;Professional1 / 2&quot;"]
    E --> Y["Not available in PC or when &quot;Viewing Mode&quot; is set to &quot;Professional1 / 2&quot;"]
    E --> Z["Available when &quot;Viewing Mode&quot; is set to &quot;Photo&quot;"]
    E --> AA["Not available in PC"]
    E --> AB["Available in NTSC / PAL"]

    F --> AC["Sound Menu 1/2"]
    F --> AD["Sound Menu 2/2"]
    AC --> AE["Mode"]
    AC --> AF["Bass"]
    AC --> AG["Treble"]
    AC --> AH["Equalizer"]
    AC --> AI["Balance"]
    AC --> AJ["Headphone Volume"]
    AC --> AK["Off"]
    AC --> AL["Volume Correction"]
    AC --> AM["Speaker Distance to Wall Over 30cm"]
    AC --> AN["Preferred Multi Audio English"]

    AD --> AO["NICAM"]
    AD --> AP["SPDIF Selection"]
    AD --> AQ["MPEG Optical Level"]
    AD --> AR["HDMI1 Input Digital"]
    AD --> AS["Audio Description Access"]
    AD --> AT["Reset to Defaults Reset"]

    AE --> AU["Available in &quot;Mode&quot; is set to &quot;Music&quot; or &quot;Speech&quot;"]
    AE --> AV["Available when &quot;Mode&quot; is set to &quot;User&quot;"]

    AF --> AW["Equalizer"]
    AW --> AX["Reset to Defaults"]

    AG --> AY["Available in digital"]
    AG --> AZ["Available in Analogue"]
    AG --> BA["Available in digital, Network video contents or Video mode"]
    AG --> BB["Available in digital"]
    AG --> BC["Available in HDMI"]
    AG --> BD["Available in freesat or DVB freesat:"]

    AH --> BE["Audio Description Menu Audio Description Off"]

    AI --> BF["DVB: Audio Description Menu Audio Description Off Volume Speakers Headphones Off"]

    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

How to Use Menu Functions

Overview ■ (Setup)

● How to operate → p. 31

VIERA Main Menu

Picture

Sound

Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - How to Use Menu Functions - 1

text_image Timer Programming - USD HCD Remaining Capacity 50/CE (50%) Wed 28.10.2019 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End #1 Acc 72 MBD SW *TTBRA* #Tender 14 C# The Bill #1 Acc 5 MBD ON OXY SOS #1 Acc 5 MBD ON *TTBRA* ... ... ...

28 Oct 20-00 21:00

(56 min.) Wed 28 Oct 21-00 22:00 (66 min.) Wed 28 Oct 22-00 23:00 (18 min.) (18 min.) Thu 28 Oct 20-00 23:00 (43 min.) ... ...

(p. 52)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 1
(p. 62)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 2

text_image Setup Menu Timer Programming Off Timer USB HDD Setup Link Settings Access Child Lock Access freesat Tuning Menu DVB Tuning Menu Access Analogue Tuning Menu Access Other Sat. Tuning Menu Access Display Settings Access Network Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 3
(p. 34 - 36)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 4
(p. 54)

Available in freesat
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 5
(p. 40 and p. 42)
Available in DVB

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 6

text_image Other Settings GUIDE Plus+ Settings Access Intelligent Frame Creation Off 24p Smooth Film Off Resolution Enhancer Off Power on Preference TV Power on Channel List Last Auto Standby Off Power Save Off 16:9 Overscan On DVI Input Setting Normal

Available in DVB or Other Sat.
(p. 36)

Available in HDMI with DVI input signal
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 7
(p. 36)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 8

text_image Enter Postcode Postcode A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(p. 36)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 9

text_image DVB Tuning Menu Favourites Edit Access Channel List Access Auto Setup Access Channel Sorting by Region Access Manual Tuning Access Update Channel List Access New Channel Message On Signal Condition Access

(p. 41 and p. 44)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 10

text_image DVB Update Channel List Progress 04.21.68 This will take about 3 minutes. C#1 Change Name Type Quality Searching Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Delta: 0

(p. 46)

Available in Analogue
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 11
(p. 41 and p. 46)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 12

text_image Display Settings Teletext FASTEXT Preferred Subtitles English Input Labels Access Banner Display Timeout 3 seconds Playing Time Display On Radio Mode Off

(p. 35)
Available in Analogue

Available in freesat, DVB or Other Sat.
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 13

text_image Input Labels AV1 AV2/S AV3 COMPONENT PC HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 DVD AV2/S AV3 COMPONENT PC HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 1/2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 14

text_image Input Labels freesat dVB Analogue Other Sat. 2/2 freesat DVB Analogue Other Sat.

(p. 55)

Available in Other Sat.

Other Satellite Tuning Menu
Favourites EditAccess
Channel ListAccess
Auto SetupAccess
Manual TuningAccess
Add New ChannelsAccess
Signal ConditionAccess

(p. 48)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 15

text_image System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Access Owner ID Access Common Interface System Update Access Software Licence Access System Information Access

(p. 36)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 16

text_image Link Settings VIERA Link HDMI Content Detection Q-Link AV2 out Standby Power Save Intelligent Auto Standby Q-Link Download 1/2 If AV2 On On (No reminder) Access

(p. 34)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 17
(p. 34)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 18
(p. 54)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 19

text_image Child Lock List - TV and AV Name Incl LockType 4 BBC 1 Wireless Fox TV 7 BBC THREE EVS Free TV 16.42 CVD Free TV 10R Release Analogus 1 BBC Analog Analogus 2 kHz AV1 External AV AV25 External AV

(p. 54)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 20

text_image freesat Auto Setup Settings Signal Quality 5 Signal Silings 4 TV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found encoding channel list

(p. 40)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 21

text_image freesat Channel List 101 BBC 1 Scotland 102 BBC 2 Scotland 103 slv 104 slv 108 BBC THREE 109 BBC FOUR 110 BBC HD

(p. 43)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 22

text_image freesat Favourites Editor All freesat Churux 101 BBC 1 Wares 102 BBC 2 Wares 103 ITV1 WALLS 104 BBC THREE 105 BBC FOUR 110 BBC HD 112 ITV2 113 ITV2+1 Favourites

(p. 43)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 23

text_image DVB Auto Setup Progress CH 21 This will be about 3 minutes. DH Channel Name Type Country 52 CEBC Channel Free TV 10 52 UBC Radio Waies Free TV 10 52 EU Free TV 10 52 Caturn Net Free TV 10 Frec TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Datar: 0 Searching

(p. 41)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 24

text_image All DVB Channels 70: CBBC Channel 72: Cartoon Nwk 105: BBCI 719: BBC Radio Wales 720: BBC Radio Cymru 1: BBC ONE Wales 7: BBC THREE

(p. 45)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 25

text_image DVB Favourites Editor All DVB Channels Favoursed 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 70 CBBC Channel 72 Carbon Nek 105 BBC 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cytru

(p. 45)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 26

text_image DVB Manual Tuning Frequency 0.0 MHz Signal Quality 0 V Signal Strength 0 10 No. Charges Name Type View Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Radius: 0 Date: 0 Stopped

(p. 44)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 27

text_image Channel Sorting by Region G3R> Best signal quality (All Regions) England Region> Region choice available

(p. 44)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 28
(p. 46)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 29

text_image Analogue Auto Setup File: CH21 You will have about 3 minutes CH Channel Name 29 30 Analogues: 2 Screening

(p. 41)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 30

text_image Analogue Channel List 1 BSC1 2 ***** 3 ***** 4 5 6 7

(p. 46)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 31
(p. 49)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 32
(p. 49)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 33

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup Serials 90% Connected Access 3% 20% This may take up to 20 minutes. No Channel Name Type Quality 1 BBC 1 Cast JV Free TV 10 2 BBC 1 CD 3 BBC HD 4 BBC Free TV 4 Pay TV 0 Ready 0 Searching

(p. 49)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 34
(p. 57)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 35
(p. 56)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 36

(p. 51)
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Oct 20-00 21:00 - 37
(p. 58)

Retuning from Setup Menu

Auto Setup retunes all channels automatically.

freesat channels

Automatically retune all the freesat channels received in the area.

● Only freesat channels are retuned.
● All the previous tuning settings (Favourites Edit and Channel List, etc.) are erased.
- If a Child Lock PIN number (p. 54) has been set, it must be entered.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 1

text_image 1 Select freesat → p. 16 TV 2 Display the menu MENU EXIT 3 Select "Setup" VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 2

text_image 1 Select freesat p. 16 TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select "Setup" VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 3

text_image ① select ② access

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 4

text_image 4 Select "freesat Tuning Menu" Setup Menu 1/2 Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock freesat Tuning Menu Access Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup ②access ①select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 6

text_image 5 Select "Auto Setup" freesat Tuning Menu Favourites Edit Channel List Auto Setup Access Signal Condition ②access OK ①select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 7

text_image For Auto Setup, using the buttons on the side panel of the TV (p. 9) ① Press repeatedly until "Auto Setup" appears ② Access "Auto Setup" TV ③ Start "Auto Setup" TV To return to TV F

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 8

text_image 6 Start Auto Setup freesat Auto Setup All freesat tuning data will be erased OK freesat Auto Setup Searching Signal Quality 0.10 Signal Strength TV Channels Found Radio Channel Found Data Channels Found Channels found, creating channel list Settings are made automatically

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 9

text_image Enter your postcode Enter Postcode for local channels Including space Postcode A B C D E F G H I J K L M N Q P Q R S T U V W X Y Z C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 10

text_image Set characters one by one ① select ② set Store green

Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order. Please ensure to include a space when entering your postcode.

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons. - "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat channels - 11

text_image Note You cannot set the postcode in this operation. The previous postcode setting is not erased.

When the operation is completed, the channel at the lowest position will be displayed.

DVB or Analogue channels

Automatically retune all DVB or Analogue channels received in the area.

  • Only DVB channels are retuned in DVB mode.
  • Only Analogue channels are retuned in Analogue mode.
    ● All the previous tuning settings (Channel List, etc.) are erased.
  • If a Child Lock PIN number (p. 54) has been set, it must be entered.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue channels - 1

text_image 1 Select DVB or Analogue p. 16 TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select "Setup" VIEWA Main Menu Picture Sound Setup 4 Select "DVB Tuning Menu "Analogue Tuning Menu"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue channels - 2

text_image Setup Menu Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock DVB Tuning Menu Access Analogue Tuning Menu Access Display Settings Network Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue channels - 3

text_image ① select ② access

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue channels - 4

text_image 5 Select "Auto Setup" DVB: DVB Tuning Menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue channels - 5

  • "DVB Tuning Menu" is available in DVB mode only.
  • "Analogue Tuning Menu" is available in Analogue mode only.

■To return to TV
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue channels - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - DVB or Analogue channels - 7

text_image For Auto Setup, using the buttons on the side panel of the TV (p. 9) ① Press repeatedly until "Auto Setup" appears ② Access "Auto Setup" ③ Start "Auto Setup" To return to TV

Note

  • If tuning has not been done completely
    → "Manual Tuning" (p. 40)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 1

text_image 5 Select "Auto Setup" DVB: DVB Tuning Menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 2

text_image Favourites Edit Channel List Auto Setup Access Channel Sorting by Region Manual Tuning Update Channel List New Channel Message On Signal Correction

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 3

text_image ① select ② access

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 5

text_image Analogue: Analogue Tuning Menu Channel List Auto Setup Access Manual Tuning

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 8

text_image DVB Auto Setup Progress CH 21 09 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 CBC Channels Free TV 10 62 BBC Radio Values Free TV 10 62 E4 Free TV 10 62 Cartoon Nick Free TV 10 Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 9 Radio: 9 Data: 0 Searching

Analogue:
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 9

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 10

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 11

text_image Analogue Auto Setup Scan C#1 21 C#1 This will take about 3 minutes. C# Channel Name 28 30 Analog: 2 Searching

Settings are made automatically

● The analogue settings are downloaded to a Q-Link compatible equipment connected to the TV in Analogue mode.

When the operation is completed, the channel at channel position "1" will be displayed.

Tuning and Editing Channels

(freesat)

You can retune channels or make your favourite channel list, skip unwanted channels, etc.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - (freesat) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["1 Select freesat"] --> B["p. 16"]
    B --> C["TV"]
    D["2 Display the menu"] --> E["MENU"]
    F["3 Select &quot;Setup&quot;"] --> G["VIEW Main Menu"]
    G --> H["Picture"]
    G --> I["Sound"]
    G --> J["Setup"]
    K["4 Select &quot;freesat Tuning Menu&quot;"] --> L["Setup Menu 1/2"]
    L --> M["Timer Programming"]
    L --> N["Off Timer Off"]
    L --> O["USB HDD Setup"]
    L --> P["Link Settings"]
    L --> Q["Child Lock"]
    L --> R["freesat Tuning Menu Access"]
    L --> S["Other Sat. Tuning Menu"]
    L --> T["Display Settings"]
    L --> U["Network Setup"]
    V["5 Select one of the following functions"] --> W["freesat Tuning Menu"]
    W --> X["Favourites Edit"]
    W --> Y["Channel List Access"]
    W --> Z["Auto Setup"]
    W --> AA["Signal Condition Access"]
    AB["6 Set"] --> AC["&quot;Retuning from Setup Menu&quot; (p. 40)"]

List favourite freesat channels Favourites Edit

Create your favourite channel list from various broadcasters.

The freesat Favourites list is available from "Channel Genre" in the TV Guide (p. 20).

① Select a channel to list
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite freesat channels Favourites Edit - 1

text_image freesat Favourites Editor All freetat Channels Favours 161 BBC 1 Wales BSC 2 Wales102 ITV17WLES183 BSC ITEMS195 BSC FOUR103 BSC HD110 ITV2112 ITV2-1113 select

② Add it to the Favourites list
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite freesat channels Favourites Edit - 2

text_image freesat Favourites Editor All freesat Channels 101 BDC 1 Values BDC 2 Values102 ITV1 WAL ES103 BDC THREE108 BBC FOUR109 BDC HD110 ITV2112 ITV2-1113 A channel is added

To add all channels to the list → yellow

To edit Favourites list■
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite freesat channels Favourites Edit - 3

text_image Select the field of Favourites to edit and: To delete the channel ●→ OK ●To delete all channels → yellow

Note

- Channel position numbers (known as logical channel numbers) cannot be changed, due to broadcast restrictions.

③ Store
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 1

Skip unwanted freesat channels Channel List

You can hide unwanted freesat channels.

The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.

Select a channel and reveal / hide
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted freesat channels Channel List - 1

text_image freesat Channel List ✓ 101 BBC 1 Scotland ✓ 102 BBC 2 Scotland ✓ 103 stv □ 104 stv □ 108 BBC THREE ✓ 109 BBC FOUR ✓ 110 BBC HD ② reveal / hide OK ① select

● To reveal all channels

☑: reveal ☐: hide (skip)

→ yellow

Check freesat signal Signal Condition

Selects a channel and checks the freesat signal condition.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Check freesat signal Signal Condition - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Check freesat signal Signal Condition - 2

text_image freesat Signal Condition Channel Name 101 BBC 1 Wales Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Bit Error Rate 0.00E+00 Satellite Astra 28.2° E Parameter 10847MHz, V. 22000kS/s

A good Signal Strength is not an indication of best signal for freesat reception. Please use the Signal Quality indicator as follows:

Signal Quality:

●Green bar → Good
●Yellow bar → Poor
●Red bar → Bad (Check the Satellite dish)

Tuning and Editing Channels

(DVB)

You can retune channels or make your favourite channel lists, skip unwanted channels, etc.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - (DVB) - 1

text_image 1 Select DVB p. 16 TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select "Setup" VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Setup ②access OK ①select 4 Select "DVB Tuning Menu" Setup Menu 1/2 Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock DVB Tuning Menu Access Display Settings Network Setup ②access OK ①select 5 Select one of the following functions DVB Tuning Menu Favourites Edit Channel List Access Auto Setup Access Channel Sorting by Region Access Manual Tuning Access Update Channel List Access New Channel Message On Signal Condition Access Auto Setup "Retuning from Setup Menu" (p. 41) 6 Set To return to TV EXIT

Sort DVB channels according to the region Channel Sorting by Region

You can sort DVB channels so that those with the best signal quality, or those for your preferred region, appear nearer the top of your Channel List.

Normally, you should select "Best signal quality (All Regions)".

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sort DVB channels according to the region Channel Sorting by Region - 1

text_image Channel Sorting by Region GUI: Test output (type: All-Region) England Explorer Region choice available

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sort DVB channels according to the region Channel Sorting by Region - 2

(select repeatedly until you reach the available region)

- If you choose to select your preferred region, you could find channels with a weaker signal appear nearer the top of your Channel List. If you have any image or sound problems, select "Best signal quality (All Regions)" instead.

Set DVB channel manually Manual Tuning

Normally use "Auto Setup" or "Update Channel List" to retune DVB channels.

If tuning has not been done completely or for adjusting the direction of the aerial, use this function.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set DVB channel manually Manual Tuning - 1

text_image DVD Manual Tuning Frequency CPU 6.5 MHz Speed-Speed: 0 10 Signal Strength: 100 No. Channel Name: Type 1/200 Time: 10:10:00; Time: 10:00:00; Signal ID: Selected

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set DVB channel manually Manual Tuning - 2

● All channels found will be added to the Channel List.

List favourite DVB channels Favourites Edit

Create your favourite channel lists from various broadcasters (up to 4: Favourites1 to 4).

The DVB Favourites lists are available for switching in the Information banner (p. 17) and from “Category” in the TV Guide (p. 21).

① Select a channel to list
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite DVB channels Favourites Edit - 1

text_image DVB Favourites Editor AICV8 Channels Favourhost 1 BBC One Wals B2C TIRL57 14 L4 CB3C Channel76 Carbon NwK72 B2C105 B2C Radio Web/78 B3C Radio Comm720 select To display other Favourites green Encrypted channel

② Add it to the Favourites list

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite DVB channels Favourites Edit - 2

text_image DVB Favourites Editor All DVB Channels EQC-Can Wets1 EQC THREE7 14 F4 CBSC Channel70 Carbon Twk72 BQCI100 DJC Radio Water718 BSC Radio Cyma720 Fworks 91 To add all channels to the list yellow A channel is added

■To edit Favourites list

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite DVB channels Favourites Edit - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["To delete a channel"] --> B["Select the channel"]
    B --> C["OK"]
    D["To name the Favourites"] --> E["red"]
    E --> F["Set characters one by one (maximum: ten characters)"]
    F --> G["User input Name"]
    G --> H{①select}
    G --> I{②set}
    H --> J["Store BACK RETURN"]
    I --> J
    J --> K["You can set characters by using numeric buttons. &quot;Characters table for numeric buttons&quot; (p. 96)"]
    K --> L["Confirm green"]
    M["To move the channel"] --> N["green"]
    N --> O["Select the new position or Select the turn"]
    O --> P["1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0"]

③ Store
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite DVB channels Favourites Edit - 4

Note

- Channel position numbers (known as logical channel numbers) can be swapped in Channel List. To swap the channel position number "Channel List" (below)

Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels Channel List

You can hide unwanted DVB channels.

The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.

Select a channel and reveal / hide
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels Channel List - 1

text_image All DVB Channels 70 CBBC Channel 72 Carbon Nwk 105 BBC 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Gyms 1 BBC ONE Wales 7 BBC THREE ② reveal / hide OK ① select ✓ : reveal □ : hide (skip) ● To reveal all channels → yellow

■To edit channels

You can also edit each channel in Channel List.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels Channel List - 2

text_image Select a channel to edit and: To retune each channel - Manual Tuning (p. 44) (only for the revealed channels) → red 1 BBC ONE Wales Radio 19:35 All DVB Channels Coronation Street Select favourites 19:30 - 20:00 Now For info press

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels Channel List - 3

flowchart
graph LR
    A["To swap the channel position number (logical channel number)"] --> B["green"]
    B --> C["Enter the new position number"]
    C --> D["Store"]
    D --> E["green"]

Tuning and Editing Channels

Update DVB channel automatically Update Channel List

You can add new channels, delete removed channels, update channel name and position automatically to Channel List.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Update DVB channel automatically Update Channel List - 1

text_image DVB Update Channel List Progress: CH 21 the all-time and 1 minute. CH Channel Status Type Cancel new EV.0 Pay EV.0 Rocke C Eddie C Sounding

- Channel List is updated while keeping your settings in Favourites Edit, Channel List, Child Lock, Timer Programming, etc.

Display a notification message New Channel Message

Selects whether to give a notification message when a new DVB channel is found. (Off / On)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display a notification message New Channel Message - 1

- Selecting OK will perform "Update Channel List".

Check DVB signal Signal Condition

Selects a channel and checks the DVB signal condition.

● To change the channel →

A good Signal Strength is not an indication of best signal for DVB reception. Please use the Signal Quality indicator as follows:

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Check DVB signal Signal Condition - 1

text_image DVB Signal Condition Channel Name 70 CBBC Channel Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Bit Error Rate 0.00E+00 Network Name Wenovs Parameter [CH62] 802 MHz

Signal Quality:

  • Green bar → Good
    ● Yellow bar → Poor
    ● Red bar → Bad (Check the Terrestrial aerial)

(Analogue)

You can retune channels or skip unwanted channels, edit channels etc.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - (Analogue) - 1

text_image 1 Select Analogue p. 16 TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select "Setup" VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Setup 4 Select "Analogue Tuning Menu" Setup Menu Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock Analogue Tuning Menu Access Display Settings Network Setup 5 Select one of the following functions Analogue Tuning Menu Channel List Access Auto Setup Access Manual Tuning Access Auto Setup "Retuning from Setup M To return to TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - (Analogue) - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - (Analogue) - 3

Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels Channel List

You can hide unwanted Analogue channels.

The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.

Select a channel and reveal / hide
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels Channel List - 1

text_image Analogue Channel List ✓ 1 BBC1 D 2 **** 3 **** ✓ 4 ✓ 5 ✓ 6 ✓ 7 ② reveal / hide OK ① select ✓ : reveal □ : hide (skip) To reveal all channels● → □ yellow

To edit channels■

You can also edit each channel in Channel List.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 1

Select a channel to edit and:

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 2

text_image Channel position Channel name A 3 ITV 23:35 All Analogue Channels itv CH23

To retune each channel - Manual Tuning (below)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 3

To move the channel position

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 4

→ Select the new position

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 6

To rename the channel name

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 7

Set characters one by one (maximum: five characters)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 8

text_image Edit channel name Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! . w a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ( ) + - * 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! . w 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 9

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 10

Store

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To edit channels■ - 11

●You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

Note

- If a VCR is connected only with the RF cable, edit "VCR".

Set Analogue channel manually Manual Tuning

Set Analogue channel manually after Auto Setup.

- If a VCR is connected only with the RF cable, it is recommended to select channel position "0".

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set Analogue channel manually Manual Tuning - 1

Select the channel position

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set Analogue channel manually Manual Tuning - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set Analogue channel manually Manual Tuning - 3

Select the channel

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set Analogue channel manually Manual Tuning - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set Analogue channel manually Manual Tuning - 5

Search and store

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set Analogue channel manually Manual Tuning - 6

Tuning and Editing Channels

(Other Sat.)

You can tune all receivable digital satellite channels or skip unwanted channels, etc.

● Some of Other Sat. functions may work to differing specifications (depending on the broadcasters).

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - (Other Sat.) - 1

text_image 1 Select freesat or Other Sat. → p. 16 TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select "Setup" VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Setup ② access ① select 1 2 abcdef 3 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 8 tuvpq 9 wxyz 0 4 Select "Other Sat. Tuning Menu" Setup Menu 1/2 Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock freesat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Access Display Settings Network Setup ② access ① select 5 Select one of the following functions Other Satellite Tuning Menu Favourites Edit Channel List Access Auto Setup Access Manual Tuning Access Add New Channels Access Signal Condition Access ② access ① select 6 Set To return to TV ■ EXIT

Set Other Sat. channel manually Manual Tuning

Normally use "Auto Setup" or "Add New Channels" to tune Other Sat. channels.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set Other Sat. channel manually Manual Tuning - 1

Set tuning parameters for the required satellite, details can usually be found in a satellite TV magazine.

Check Other Sat. signal Signal Condition

Selects a channel and checks the Other Sat. signal condition.

To change the channel

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Check Other Sat. signal Signal Condition - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Check Other Sat. signal Signal Condition - 2

A good Signal Strength is not an indication of best signal for Other Sat. reception. Please use the Signal Quality indicator as follows:

Signal Quality:

●Green bar → Good

●Yellow bar → Poor

●Red bar → Bad (Check the Satellite dish)

Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup

Any receivable digital compliant satellite channels can be tuned.

- Only Other Sat. channels are retuned.

All the previous tuning settings are erased.

If a Child Lock PIN number (p. 54) has been set, it must be entered.

① Select the satellite
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup - 1

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Eurobird freesat and other channels OK ① select ② set

Selectable satellites are Astra2/Eurobird, Astra1 and Hotbird.

Check the dish alignment for the satellite you want to select

Astra2/Eurobird • p. 10

Astra1, Hotbird ➤ Please consult the received satellite broadcasting companies.

If you want to tune from all available satellites, select "Any Satellite".

② Check the signal condition and the message
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup - 2

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astral2/Euroaird freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Looked If you select "Any Satellite", this step is skipped. Other Satellite Auto Setup All Other Satellite tuning data will be erased

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup - 3

If you select "Any Satellite", this step is skipped.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup - 4

flowchart
graph TD
    A[" "] --> B["Other Satellite Auto Setup"]
    B --> C["All Other Satellite tuning data will be erased"]

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup - 5

  • It takes a while to check the connection for your selected satellite.
  • Ensure that the Signal Lock status is shown as "Locked". If it is not locked, the search cannot be executed.
  • If the status is shown as "Not locked" and Signal Quality / Signal Strength have no indications, please check the dish alignment.

If the status is shown as “Not locked” but there are some levels of Signal Quality / Signal Strength indicated, select “Any Satellite” in Satellite Selection and try again.

③ Set the search mode and start Auto Setup
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup - 6

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Search Mode\nFree Channels"] --> B{OK}
    C["All Channels"] --> B
    B --> D["① set"]
    B --> E["② start"]

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set all receivable digital satellite channels Auto Setup - 7

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup Setup To: 0% 100% Project This may take up to 20 min next. No. Create Name Type Country 1 BBC Cloud (W) Free TV 10 2 BBC (C) Free TV 10 3 BBC HD Free TV 10 4 Goods Free TV 10 Free TV 4 Max TV 8 Min TV 9 Searching

- If you select “Astra2/Eurobird” or “Any Satellite”, freesat channels will also be searched. But the channels which have already been tuned in freesat will not be duplicated.

Settings are made automatically

When the operation is completed, the channel at channel position "1" will be displayed.

Add Other Sat. channel automatically Add New Channels

You can add any new channels found automatically to Channel List.

① Check the signal condition
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Add Other Sat. channel automatically Add New Channels - 1

text_image Other Satellite Add New Channels - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astra2/Curobird freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Locked

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Add Other Sat. channel automatically Add New Channels - 2

If you selected "Any Satellite" in Auto Setup, this step is skipped.

  • It takes a while to check the connection for your selected satellite.
  • Ensure that the Signal Lock status is shown as "Locked". If it is not locked, the search cannot be executed.
  • If the status is shown as "Not locked" and Signal Quality / Signal Strength have no indications, please check the dish alignment.

② Set the search mode and start Add New Channels
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Add Other Sat. channel automatically Add New Channels - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Search Mode\nFree Channels"] --> B["All Channels"]
    B --> C{OK}
    C --> D["① set"]
    C --> E["② start"]
    F["Other Satellite Add New Channels"] --> G["Select for:\nProgress 0.000\nThis record take up to 20 minutes, 100%"]
    G --> H["No.\nChannel Name\nType\nQual b"]
    H --> I["Free TV II\nPlay TV II\nSerial II\nSending"]

- New channels can only be added to the existing Channel List from the same satellite.

Tuning and Editing Channels

List favourite Other Sat. channels Favourites Edit

Create your favourite channel lists from various broadcasters (up to 4: Favourites1 to 4). The Other Sat. Favourites lists are available for switching in the Information banner (p. 17).

① Select a channel to list
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite Other Sat. channels Favourites Edit - 1

text_image Other Sat. Favourites Editor All Other Sat. Options 1. BBC One Window BBC.TI-REF2 3. E4 CBC Channels4 Cartoon Web5 UBC8 BBC Radio Values7 BBC Radio Optus8 Favourites1 select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite Other Sat. channels Favourites Edit - 2

text_image To display other Favourites → green To change the category → red

② Add it to the Favourites list
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite Other Sat. channels Favourites Edit - 3

text_image Other Sat. Favourites Editor All Other Sat. Channels 1 BBC One Wales 2 BBC THREE 3 E4 4 CBC Channel 5 Custom/Nick 6 BBCJ 7 BBC Radio Wales 8 BBC Radio Curr. A channel is added

To add continuous block of channels to the list at once

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite Other Sat. channels Favourites Edit - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Yellow"] --> B["Make the block"]
    B --> C["OK"]

■To edit Favourites list
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite Other Sat. channels Favourites Edit - 5

flowchart
graph TD
    A["To delete the channel"] --> B["OK"]
    C["To name the Favourites"] --> D["red"]
    B --> E["Set characters one by one"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["User input Name"]
    F --> G{① select}
    F --> H{② set}
    G --> I["OK"]
    H --> J["OK"]
    I --> K["Store BACK/RETURN"]
    J --> K
    L["To move the channel"] --> M["green"]
    M --> N["Select the new position"]
    N --> O["Confirm green"]
    P["Select the turn"] --> Q["1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0"]

③ Store
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - List favourite Other Sat. channels Favourites Edit - 6

Skip unwanted Other Sat. channels, Edit Other Sat. Channels Channel List

You can hide unwanted Other Sat. channels.

The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.

Select a channel and reveal / hide
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted Other Sat. channels, Edit Other Sat. Channels Channel List - 1

text_image Other Sat. Channel List ✓ 2: freestatHome | Free TV ✓ 3: freestatSSU | Free TV ✓ 4: Bit Shorts | Free TV ✓ 5: HINRG LOWNRG | Free TV ✓ 6: WELL Class | Free TV ✓ 7: GROOVE | Free TV ✓ 8: - | Unknown ② reveal / hide ① select A channel that cannot

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted Other Sat. channels, Edit Other Sat. Channels Channel List - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted Other Sat. channels, Edit Other Sat. Channels Channel List - 3
■To edit channels

You can also edit each channel in Channel List.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Skip unwanted Other Sat. channels, Edit Other Sat. Channels Channel List - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Select a channel to edit and:"] --> B["To delete the channel"]
    B --> C["red"]
    D["To swap the channel position"] --> E["green"]
    E --> F["Enter the new position number"]
    F --> G["Store green"]

Shipping Condition

Resets the TV to its original condition with no channels tuned in.

All settings other than "Owner ID" and "USB HDD registration" are reset (channels, picture, sound settings, etc.).

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Shipping Condition - 1

text_image 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select "Setup" VIE/M Main Menu Picture Sound Setup ②access ①select 3 Select "System Menu" Setup Menu 2/2 DIVX® VOD Advance(isfccc) Off System Menu Access Other Settings ②access ①select 4 Select "Shipping Condition" System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Owner ID Common Interface System Update Software Licence ②access ①select 5 Set To return to TV EXIT

Restore Settings Shipping Condition

① Check the message and initialise
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Restore Settings Shipping Condition - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["All tuning data will be erased\nAre you sure?\nAre you sure?"] --> B{OK (confirm)}
    B --> C{OK (confirm)}
    C --> D{OK (start Shipping Condition)}
    E["Confirm"] --> F["EXIT"]
    E --> G["RETURN"]

② Follow the on screen instructions

Reset to Factory Shipping Condition Completed. Please switch off TV.

● "Auto Setup" will automatically start when Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On. (p. 12)

■To retune TV channels only, e.g. after moving house

→ "Retuning from Setup Menu" (p. 40 and p. 41)

Timer Programming

Timer Programming from Menu

The Timer Programming menu allows you to choose programmes that you wish to remind watching or record to the external recorder or the USB HDD. At the correct time, the TV will tune to the correct channel automatically to record even if the TV is in Standby mode.

TV Guide may also be used to set timer programming event (p. 22).

●Timer Programming can store up to 15 events.
- For recording using Timer Programming, the TV must be either On or in standby. For reminders to be displayed, the TV must be On.
● No other channel can be selected while the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.
- It may not be possible to record an encrypted programme (which is copy-protected).
- When recording programmes to the external recorder, be sure to make the proper settings on the recorder connected to the TV.

If a compatible recorder with Q-Link or similar technologies is connected to the TV (p. 86) and the "Link Settings" (p. 34) are correct, no setting of the recorder is required. Also read the manual of the recorder.

  • If the recorder is not compatible with Q-Link or similar technologies, set "Q-Link" in the Setup Menu (p. 34) to the connected terminal (AV1 or AV2), and set the timer of the recorder in addition to the Timer Programming on the TV. For preparations of a recorder, read the manual of the recorder.
  • When recording programmes to the USB HDD, be sure to register the USB HDD and enable it for recording in the "USB HDD Setup" (p. 62).
  • Recordings are always in standard definition composite video via SCART, even if the original programme is in high definition.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Timer Programming from Menu - 1

text_image INPUT TV MENU EXIT GUIDE OK 1 2 3 4

Select the tuner you want to use

→ p. 16

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the tuner you want to use - 1

Display the menu

MENU

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display the menu - 1

Select "Setup"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Setup" - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Setup" - 2

text_image ① select ② access OK

■To return to TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To return to TV - 1

Select "Timer Programming"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Timer Programming" - 1

text_image Setup Menu Timer Programming Access Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock freesat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Timer Programming" - 2

text_image ① select ② access

■To unlock the tuner (stop recording)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To unlock the tuner (stop recording) - 1

Set

Note

Check that the LED is orange. If not, timer programmes are not active or not stored.

  • Timer Programming reminder messages will remain displayed until one of the following occurs: You press the OK button to view the programme or the EXIT button to cancel the reminder. The timer programming event that the reminder is set for ends.
  • “!” identifies that any timer programming events have overlapped. “Ext Rec.” and “USB HDD Rec.” are given priority over “Reminder”. When two or more “Ext Rec.” / “USB HDD Rec.” overlap, the first timer programming event starts and finishes as programmed. The next timer programming event will then start.

2 mins. before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.

To remove the message and start the programme

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 1

To cancel the Timer Programming

● The recording of Timer Programming will automatically change to the programmed channel 10 seconds before the start time.
- To stop recording of the timer programming event, it may be necessary to stop the recorder manually.
- The recording of Timer Programming will be performed even if the TV is in Rewind LIVE TV recording (p. 65) and Pause Live TV recording (p. 89). In this case, these recordings will be cancelled.

Set timer programming event details Timer Programming

① Start making the settings

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Start making the settings - 1

② Select the function (Ext Rec., USB HDD Rec. or Reminder)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Select the function (Ext Rec., USB HDD Rec. or Reminder) - 1

Ext Rec. / : to record the programme to the external recorder (Ext Rec.) or the USB HDD Rec. USB HDD (USB HDD Rec.)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Select the function (Ext Rec., USB HDD Rec. or Reminder) - 2

When the start time comes, the channel will be switched automatically and the video and audio signals will be output. 2 mins. before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.

Reminder : to remind you to watch the programme

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Select the function (Ext Rec., USB HDD Rec. or Reminder) - 3

When you are watching TV, a reminder message appears 2 mins. before the start time. Press the OK button to switch to the programmed channel.

③ Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below)

Set items in the order of ① to ④

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set items in the order of ① to ④ - 1

select the item
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set items in the order of ① to ④ - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set items in the order of ① to ④ - 3

① ③ and ④ can also be entered with numeric buttons.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set items in the order of ① to ④ - 4
0

Information of the USB HDD (if available)

Displayed if the timer programming events are overlapped

Timer programming - Programmes according to the time setting

Guide: Guide link programming - Programmes according to the TV Guide signal (p. 23)

S/P: Split Programme programming (p. 23)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set items in the order of ① to ④ - 5

text_image Timer Programming USB HDD Remaining Capacity 500GB (50%) Wed 28.10.2009 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End Ext Rec. 72 BBC 2W Reminder 14 E4 The Bill Code Wed 28 Oct 20:00 21:30 (90 min.) Ext Rec. 1 BBC ONE DIY SOS Ext Rec. 1 BBC ONE STTL Thu 29 Oct 10:30 | 11:30 (60 min.) ---

Records with subtitles (if available)

● To indicate this → yellow (press again to remove subtitles)

Duration (automatic display)

④Ending time

③ Starting time

① Channel number ② Date

: freesat

D : DVB

A : Analogue

S : Other Sat.

- You cannot change the mode within the menu.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Channel number ② Date - 1

one day ahead

daily or weekly (press repeatedly)

● Daily Sun-Sat: Sunday to Saturday

● Daily Mon-Sat: Monday to Saturday

● Daily Mon-Fri: Monday to Friday

● Weekly Sat/Fri/Thu/Wed/Tue/Mon/Sun: Same time on the same day every week

④ Store

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ④ Store - 1

■To change a timer programming event

→ Select the programme to be changed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change a timer programming event - 1

→ Correct as necessary (as above)

■To cancel a timer programming event

→ Select the programme to be deleted

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To cancel a timer programming event - 1

■To record with subtitles (if available)

→ Select the programme to record with subtitles

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To record with subtitles (if available) - 1

● Each time pressed: auto ←→ off

■To cancel a timer programming event temporarily

→ Select the programme to be cancelled

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To cancel a timer programming event temporarily - 1

● Each time pressed: cancel ←→ stop cancelling

→ Select the programme to be viewed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To view details of the programming (only for Guide link programming) - 1

- Press again to return to Timer Programming menu.

● This function is not available in Analogue or Other Sat. mode.

Guide link programming is Timer Programming which is controlled by information from the TV Guide; if programme start and end times are changed by the broadcaster, the timer programming event will follow the change. A Split Programme programming is a Guide link programming which is interrupted by one or more other programmes. Note that Guide link programming (including Split Programme programming) only works reliably if correct information is received from broadcasters.

Child Lock

You can lock specific channels / AV input terminals and control who watches them.

When the locked channel / input is selected, a message appears; by entering the PIN number, you can watch it.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Child Lock - 1

text_image MENU EXIT 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select "Setup" VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Setup 3 Select "Child Lock" Setup Menu 1/2 Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock Access freesat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup 4 Set To return to TV EXIT

Control channel audience Child Lock

① Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 2

● Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
● Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it.

② Select "Child Lock List"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Select "Child Lock List" - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Select "Child Lock List" - 2

- In freesat mode, additional lock items will appear.

freesat Adult Channels: Select "Hide" to hide channels of the adult genre in TV Guide and Channel List. All the Timer Programming events of the adult genre will be cancelled.

freesat Players: Locks freesat content supplied through the internet.

Unlock: With this setting selected, you will not be required to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN when viewing freesat Player content. This is the default setting.

Lock Guidance Content: With this setting selected, you will be asked to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN whenever you wish to watch freesat Player content which is signalled as "Guidance" (i.e. originally broadcast post watershed).

Lock All Content: With this setting selected, you will be required to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN every time you wish to watch freesat Player content.

③ Select the channel / input to be locked

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ③ Select the channel / input to be locked - 1

text_image Child Lock List - TV and AV Name: Input Lock Type 4 BCD1 Weeks 7 BCD3 THES 16 E4 VOR BBC1 2 **** AVI AOS Cable Fbox TV Fox TV Fox TV Analogus Analogus Analogus AVI AVI Econd AV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ③ Select the channel / input to be locked - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ③ Select the channel / input to be locked - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["To cancel"] --> B["Select the locked channel / input"]
    B --> C["OK"]
    D["To jump to the top of the next input"] --> E["red"]
    F["To lock all"] --> G["green"]
    H["To cancel all locks"] --> I["yellow"]

Appears when the channel / input is locked

■To change the PIN number

Select "Change PIN"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 3

Enter a new PIN number twice

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 4

Note

- Setting "Shipping Condition" (p. 51) erases the PIN number and all settings.

Input Labels

For easier identification and selection of the input mode, you can label each input mode or skip terminals that are not connected to any equipment.

● To select the input mode → p. 28

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Input Labels - 1

text_image MENU EXIT OK BACK RETURN Panasonic TV

■To return to TV EXIT

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Input Labels - 2

1 Display the menu

Select "Setup"

Select "Display Settings"

Select "Input Labels"

5 Select a input terminal and set

The labels you set will be displayed in the "Input Selection" menu (p. 28), "TV Selection" menu (p. 16) or banner.

- If "Skip" is selected, the input will not be displayed in the "Input Selection" menu and you cannot select the mode.

■User input

You can name each input mode yourself.

Select "User input"

Set characters one by one (maximum: ten characters)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■User input - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■User input - 2

text_image User Input Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 : A a b c d e f g h i j k m n o p r s t u v w x y z 1 1 + - ?

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■User input - 3

Store

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■User input - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■User input - 5

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

Owner ID

Entry of the PIN number and personal information (your name, address and postcode). In the unfortunate event of theft, the Owner ID will help the Police to determine the owner.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Owner ID - 1

text_image 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select "Setup" VISA Main Menu Picture Sound Setup ②access ①select 3 Select "System Menu" Setup Menu 2/2 DivX® VOD Advance(isfccc) Off System Menu Access Other Settings ②access ①select 4 Select "Owner ID" System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Owner ID Access Common Interface System Update Software Licence System Information ②access ①select 5 Set To return to TV EXIT

Input owner ID Owner ID

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Input owner ID Owner ID - 1

text_image ① Enter the PIN number (4 digits) Owner ID Please enter now PIN PIN * 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Enter the PIN number twice at first setting. Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it. The PIN number cannot be reset.

② Enter your name, house number, and postcode, in that order Select NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE Set characters one by one Return to select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Input owner ID Owner ID - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Owner ID-Data Entry"] --> B["Access"]
    B --> C{Select}
    C --> D["OK"]
    C --> E{OK}
    D --> F["USE NO"]
    E --> G["POSTCODE"]
    F --> H["User input"]
    G --> H
    H --> I["OR"]
    I --> J["OK"]
    I --> K["OK"]
    J --> L["set"]
    K --> L
    L --> M["Other items: BACK, RETURN, or Exit the menu, EXIT"]

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons. - "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

■To check the personal information stored

Hold down for about 6 sec.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To check the personal information stored - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To check the personal information stored - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To check the personal information stored - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To check the personal information stored - 4

natural_image Illustration of a flat-screen monitor connected to a wall-mounted tower (no text or symbols visible)

● The PIN number is not displayed.

■To change the PIN number

Select "PIN"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 3

Enter a new PIN number twice

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 4

Using Common Interface

The Common Interface Module menu provides access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) Modules.

This TV works only Pay TV modules complying with CI standard.

- This function is not available for BSkyB's Sky channels.

Caution

● Turn Off Mains power On / Off switch whenever inserting or removing the CI module.
- If a viewing card and a card reader come as a set, first insert the card reader, then insert the viewing card into the card reader.
- Insert the module in the correct direction.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Caution - 1

text_image CI slot ● Remove the cover before using CI slot. Insert or remove straightly and completely CI module

Side of the TV

Insert the CI module (optional)

● The features that appear on screen are dependent on the contents of the selected CI module.
- Follow the instructions that came with the viewing card to tune in the pay-TV channels. If pay-TV channels do not appear, perform the below to verify the card is recognized by the TV.
- For more details, see the manual of the CI module, or check with the broadcaster.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Insert the CI module (optional) - 1

text_image 1 Select DVB or Other Sat. → p. 16 TV 2 Display the menu MENU EXIT 3 Select "Setup" VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Setup ②access OK ①select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Insert the CI module (optional) - 2

text_image 4 Select "System Menu" Setup Menu 2/2 DivX® VOD Advance(isfccc) Off System Menu Access Other Settings ②access OK ①select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Insert the CI module (optional) - 3

text_image 5 Select "Common Interface" System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Owner ID Common Interface Access System Update Software Licence System Information ②access ①select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Insert the CI module (optional) - 4

text_image 6 Access Common Interface Common Interface Slot 1: Module inserted OK

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Insert the CI module (optional) - 5

text_image 7 Follow the on screen operation guide (Check the instructions provided with the CI module)

For example: select, go → OK

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Insert the CI module (optional) - 6

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Black Triangle"] --> B["White Circle"]
    C["Red"] --> D["Green"]
    E["Yellow"] --> F["Blue"]

- On screen operation guide may not correspond to the remote control buttons.

Updating the TV Software

From time to time, a new version of software may become available for download to enhance the performance or operations of the TV.

In DVB mode, a notification banner will appear when one of the BBC channels is turned to if a new available software is found.

  • To download → OK
  • If you choose not to download → EXIT

You can update any new software automatically, or manually.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Updating the TV Software - 1

text_image 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select "Setup" VIEA Main Menu Picture Sound Setup 3 Select "System Menu" Setup Menu 2/2 DivX® VOD Advance(Isfccc) Off System Menu Access Other Settings 4 Select "System Update" System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Owner ID Common Interface System Update Access Software Licence System Information 5 Set ■To return to TV EXIT

Update TV's software system System Update

To update automatically

Select "Auto Update Search in Standby" and set to "On"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To update automatically - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To update automatically - 2

● Automatically performs a search in standby and downloads an update, if any software updates are available.
● The automatic updating is performed at night under the following conditions:
- Standby (TV turned Off with the remote control)
- Recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording is not in progress.

If System Update is performed, the software will be updated (it may change TV functions). If you do not wish to do so, set "Auto Update Search in Standby" to "Off". The notification banner will keep appearing during the period of new software availability, usually 2 to 3 days.

To update immediately

Select "System Update Search Now"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To update immediately - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To update immediately - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To update immediately - 3

text_image (for several mins.) and displays a corresponding message if any

Download

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To update immediately - 4

Note

  • Download may take up to 60 mins.
    ● During software download and update, DO NOT perform any operations on the TV or switch Off the TV.

Displaying PC Screen on TV

The screen of the PC connected to the TV can be displayed on the TV.

You can also listen to PC sound with the audio cable connected.

● To connect PC → p. 92

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Displaying PC Screen on TV - 1

text_image 1 Select the external input AV 2 Select "PC" Input Selection AV1 AV2/S AV3 COMPONENT PC HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 TV Media Server ■To return to TV → TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Displaying PC Screen on TV - 2

text_image ① select ② access

● Corresponding signals → p. 98

- If "H-freq." or "V-freq." is shown in red, the signals may not be supported.

■PC menu setting

● To make settings → "How to Use Menu Functions" ① to ④ (p. 31)

MenuItemAdjustments / Configurations (options)
PictureAdvanced SettingsR-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright red area
G-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright green area
B-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright blue area
R-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark red area
G-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark green area
B-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark blue area
GammaSwitches the gamma curve (1.8 / 2.0 / 2.2 / 2.4 / 2.6)
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default Advanced Settings
SetupPC SetupInput ResolutionSwitches to a wide viewVGA (640 × 480 pixels), WVGA (852 × 480 pixels),XGA (1,024 × 768 pixels), WXGA (1,280 × 768 pixels, 1,366 × 768 pixels)Options change depending on signals
ClockSet to the minimum level if noise occurs
H-posAdjusts horizontal position
V-posAdjusts vertical position
Clock PhaseEliminates flicker and distortionAdjust after Clock adjustmentSet to the minimum level if noise occurs
SyncChooses another synchronous signal if the image is distorted (H & V / On Green)H & V : by the horizontal and vertical signals from your PCOn Green : by the green signal from your PC (if available)
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default PC Setup settings

● Other items → p. 32 - 36

Note

- For HDMI-compatible PC, possible to connect to HDMI terminals (HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4) by using HDMI cable (p. 97).

Advanced Picture Settings

You can adjust and setup the detailed picture settings for each Viewing Mode.

● To use this function completely, set "Advance(isfccc)" to "On" in the Setup Menu. → p. 35

For PC input mode, some functions are available without setting "Advance(isfccc)".

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Advanced Picture Settings - 1

text_image 1 Select the input mode to adjust and setup p. 16 and p. 28 TV AV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select "Picture" VISTA Main Menu Picture Sound Setup ② access OK ① select 4 Select "Viewing Mode" and set the mode Picture Menu 1/2 Viewing Mode Contrast Brightness Colour Sharpness Colour Balance Warm Vivid Colour Off C.A.T.S. Off P-NR Off ② set ① select 5 Select one of the following functions Picture Menu 2/2 Picture Display On Advanced Settings Access Lock Settings Access Copy Adjustment Access Reset to Defaults Reset ② access OK ① select "Copy Adjustment" is avail "Viewing Mode" in the Pict to "Professional1" or "Profe To return to TV EXIT Set

Lock the picture setting Lock Settings

Advanced Settings can be locked for each Viewing Mode.

Additionally, Contrast, Brightness, Colour, Sharpness, Tint and Reset to Defaults in the Picture Menu can be locked for "Professional1" and "Professional2".

"Professional1" and "Professional2" can be locked for each input.

① Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 1

text_image Lock Settings-PIN Entry Please enter new PIN PIN

● Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
● Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it.

② Select "Adjustment Lock" and set to "On"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Select "Adjustment Lock" and set to "On" - 1

text_image Lock Settings Change PIN Adjustment Lock On ② set ① select

■To change the PIN number

Select "Change PIN"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 2

Enter a new PIN number twice

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To change the PIN number - 3

Adjust the detailed picture settings Advanced Settings

● To make settings → "How to Use Menu Functions" 1 to 4 (p. 31)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Adjust the detailed picture settings Advanced Settings - 1

text_image Advanced Settings R-Gain G-Cain B-Gain R-Cutoff G-Cutoff B-Cutoff Gamma Reset to Defaults 2.2 Reset

Menu Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)

PictureAdvanced SettingsR-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright red area
G-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright green area
B-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright blue area
R-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark red area
G-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark green area
B-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark blue area
GammaSwitches the gamma curve (1.8 / 2.0 / 2.2 / 2.4 / 2.6)
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default Advanced Settings

For the mode of "Professional1" or "Professional2" in "Viewing Mode"

"Professional1" and "Professional2" can be adjusted and set for each input.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For the mode of "Professional1" or "Professional2" in "Viewing Mode" - 1

Menu Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)

PictureAdvanced SettingsWhite BalanceR-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright red area
G-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright green area
B-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright blue area
R-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark red area
G-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark green area
B-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark blue area
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default White Balance
Colour ManagementR-HueAdjusts the picture hue of red area
G-HueAdjusts the picture hue of green area
B-HueAdjusts the picture hue of blue area
R-SaturationAdjusts the saturation of red area
G-SaturationAdjusts the saturation of green area
B-SaturationAdjusts the saturation of blue area
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default Colour Management
GammaGammaSwitches the gamma curve (1.8 / 2.0 / 2.2 / 2.4 / 2.6)
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default Gamma

Copy the settings to the other input Copy Adjustment

You can copy the selected "Professional1" or "Professional2" settings to that of the other input.

The settings of Contrast, Brightness, Colour, Sharpness, Tint and Advanced Settings will be copied.

Select the destination to copy to

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the destination to copy to - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the destination to copy to - 2

- You cannot copy to the locked mode.

USB HDD Recording

You can record the digital TV programmes to the connected USB HDD and enjoy playing back in various ways.

Analogue TV programme cannot be recorded to the USB HDD.

● The data broadcasting (MHEG, etc.), radio broadcasting and the periods without any signal will not be recorded.
● Not all the programmes can be recorded depending on the broadcaster and service provider.

This TV supports USB HDD with capacity from 160 GB up to 2 TB.

If the remaining capacity of the USB HDD is run out, the recording cannot be done.

Regarding the performance, not all USB HDDs are guaranteed.

Check the USB HDDs that have been tested for the performance with this TV at the following website. (English only)

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

Caution

  • Register the USB HDD with this TV in order to use it for recording. Please note that USB HDD will be formatted and all data (including the data from your PC, etc.) in it will be erased when you register it.
  • In order to use the USB HDD with your PC after you use it with this TV for recording, format the drive on your PC. To format, refer to the manual of the PC. Please note that all data in the USB HDD will be erased when it is formatted.
    ● The data recorded to the USB HDD with this TV can only be played back on this TV. You cannot playback its contents with another TV (including the TV of the same model number) or any PCs.
  • If your TV is repaired due to a malfunction, the registered USB HDD may not be available with your repaired TV. Register this USB HDD again to use it with your repaired TV. (All data in it will be erased.)

USB HDD connection

Connect the USB HDD to the USB 1 or 2 port.

socket outlet

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - USB HDD connection - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Power Supply"] --> B["USB HDD"]
    B --> C["USB cable"]
    C --> D["USB2 Port"]
    D --> E["Computer"]

Be sure to connect the USB HDD to the socket outlet.

Do not turn off or disconnect the USB HDD during operation. It may cause malfunction of the drive or damage the recorded data.

To remove the USB HDD safely from the TV

→ p. 63 and p. 67

Setting for USB HDD

Register and setup the USB HDD with this TV in order to use it for recording. Connect the USB HDD before starting this settings. "USB HDD connection" (above)

Before the settings, be sure to turn on the USB HDD.

  • You cannot change the settings for the USB HDD while recording is in progress.
  • Please note that USB HDD will be formatted and all data in it will be erased when you register it.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 1

text_image 1 Display the menu MENU MENU

Select "Setup"
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 3

text_image ① select ② access

Select "USB HDD Setup"
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 4

text_image Setup Menu Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Access Link Settings Child Lock freesat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 5

text_image ① select ② access

Select "Device Setup" and set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 7

text_image USB HDD Setup Device Setup Access One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Setting for USB HDD - 8

text_image ① select ② access

Register and setup the USB HDD Device Setup

All the USB devices recognized as a mass storage device will be listed. You can only register USB HDDs.

- Up to 8 USB HDDs can be registered with this TV. However you can only choose one USB HDD for recording at a time.

Some USB HDD may not be registered.

Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 1

text_image USB HDD Device Setup ProductConnect: Name Mode Yes USB Drive A Yes USB Flash Disk

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 2

For the information of the highlighted device

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 3

Caution of USB HDD recording and playing back

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 4

text_image USB HDD Registration and formatting Once the USB HDD has been registered, any data recorded to it from this TV can only be played back on this TV. If your TV is repaired due to malfunction, any registered USB HDD may not be recognised. Would you like to continue? Yes No

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 5

Confirmation of USB HDD registration

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 6

text_image USB HDD Registration and formatting To use this device for recording, it must be registered and formatted. All previous data will be lost. Would you like to continue? Yes No

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 7

Confirmation of USB HDD format

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 8

text_image USB HDD Registration and formatting This device will be formatted and all contents deleted. Are you sure? Yes No

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 9

Confirmation of USB HDD name

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 10

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 11

The name for the registered USB HDD is created automatically. If you want to edit the name, select "Yes". Set characters one by one Store

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the USB HDD for recording and start registration / setup - 12

text_image USB HDD Name USB HDD 11 A B C D E F G H I J L N N O P Q R S T U V W X Y/Z C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # a b c d e ,f g h ;i-j ;j-x ;k$m n{o p c c f s \r uVERY W X Y Z ;d ; + - - -

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

# #

#

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - # - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["OK"] -->|①select| B["SET"]
    C["SET"] -->|②set| B
    B --> D["BACK/RETURN"]

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

- Confirmation to enable USB HDD for recording

If the registered USB HDD for recording already exists, this confirmation screen will be displayed to switch to enable this USB HDD for recording.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - # - 2

text_image USB HDD Registration and formatting Do you want to enable this device for recording? When disconnecting any USB device, always use the "Safely Remove USB" function in the USB HDD Device Setup menu to avoid any corruption of recorded content. Yes No

: The USB HDD is registered and available for recording / playing back if the connection status is "Yes".

Only one registered USB HDD on the list can be available for recording.

: The USB HDD is registered and available for playing back if the connection status is "Yes".

Name is displayed if the registration is completed

Connection status (Yes: connected / No: not connected)

To remove the USB HDD safely from the TV, ensure the status is "No" before removing.

● To change the status → yellow

●You can also remove the USB HDD safely from Media Player

→ "Remove the USB devices safely" (p. 67)

■To unregister the registered USB HDD

- Once you unregister the USB HDD, it will not be possible to playback any of the recorded content on any TV. Select the USB HDD Unregister

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To unregister the registered USB HDD - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To unregister the registered USB HDD - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To unregister the registered USB HDD - 3

● The confirmation screen will be displayed twice.

Select "Yes" to unregister.

USB HDD Recording

Recording the TV programme to USB HDD

You can record the current programme immediately by using "One Touch Recording".

You can also record the current programme constantly for the selected period by using “Rewind LIVE TV” so that you can go back or pause the current programme.

  • Ensure the connection, registration and setup are completed before start recording p. 62 and p. 63
  • Ensure not to connect or disconnect any USB devices during USB HDD recording. Otherwise the recording may not work properly.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Recording the TV programme to USB HDD - 1

text_image 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select "Setup" VISA Main Menu Picture Sound Setup 3 Select "USB HDD" Setup Menu Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Access Link Settings Child Lock freesat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup 4 Select "One Touch" USB HDD Setup Device Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off To return to TV■ EXIT

1

Display the menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display the menu - 1

2

Select "Setup"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Setup" - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Setup" - 2

text_image ① select ② access OK

3

Select "USB HDD Setup"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "USB HDD Setup" - 1

text_image Setup Menu Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Access Link Settings Child Lock freesat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "USB HDD Setup" - 2

text_image ① select ② access

4

Select "One Touch Recording" or "Rewind LIVE TV"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "One Touch Recording" or "Rewind LIVE TV" - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "One Touch Recording" or "Rewind LIVE TV" - 2

5

Set

One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record One Touch Recording

Recording the current programme in the USB HDD immediately.

Select the maximum recording time (30 / 60 / 90 / 120 / 180 minutes)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record One Touch Recording - 1

text_image USB HDD Setup Device Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record One Touch Recording - 2

To start One Touch Recording■

Set the position to "TV" Start

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To start One Touch Recording■ - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To start One Touch Recording■ - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To start One Touch Recording■ - 3

text_image LED will turn to orange (flash) while One Touch Recording is in progress.

No other channel can be selected while the recording is in progress.

To stop recording on the way■

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To stop recording on the way■ - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["DV/DV/CR"] --> B["TV"]
    C["or"] --> D["GUIDE"]
    E["EXIT"] --> F["Circle"]

To playback or delete the recorded contents ■

→ "Using Media Player" (p. 71) or "Video" in VIERA TOOLS (p. 30)

Even if One Touch Recording is in progress, you can playback all the contents.

However, the recording may not work properly while playback.

Record constantly Rewind LIVE TV

Recording the current programme constantly.

This function will not work on MHEG Linked services, i.e. ITV HD and BBC Multiscreen.

Select "On" to start Rewind LIVE TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "On" to start Rewind LIVE TV - 1

text_image USB HDD Setup Device Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "On" to start Rewind LIVE TV - 2

When you select "On", the recording will start automatically.

To operate the Rewind LIVE TV

Set the position to "TV"

DVD/VCR TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 1

To pause → Ⅱ/Ⅰ

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 2

● To search backward → (press and hold for about a second)

● After pausing or searching backward, the following buttons are available to operate.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 3

text_image search backward pause search forward playback stop (stops the current operation and goes back to live TV)

search backward / forward

pause / playback

playback

stop

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 4

(press and hold for about a second)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 7

stops the current operation and goes back to live TV

■To stop the Rewind LIVE TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To stop the Rewind LIVE TV - 1

text_image USB HDD Setup Device Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To stop the Rewind LIVE TV - 2

select "Off"

- If you stop the Rewind LIVE TV, the recorded content for the Rewind LIVE TV will be deleted.

- Rewind LIVE TV will be stopped and the recorded content deleted automatically in the following conditions: (Even if Rewind LIVE TV stops for the following conditions, as long as the setting is “On”, the new recording will start automatically in a condition that makes the recording available.)

  • selected other channels
  • selected locked channel
  • selected invalid channel
  • no TV signal
  • when the other recording starts
  • when the TV is turned off or standby

Using Media Player

Media Player allows you to enjoy photo, video or music recorded on an SD Card and a USB Flash

Memory, and recorded contents on the registered USB HDD.

VIERA IMAGE VIEWER is the function of the easy viewing for photos or videos recorded on an SD Card on the TV screen by simply inserting into the SD Card slot.

Photo mode : Still pictures recorded by digital cameras will be displayed.

Video mode : (For SD Card or USB Flash Memory) Moving pictures recorded by digital video cameras will be played back.

(For registered USB HDD) TV programmes recorded in USB HDD registered to this TV will be played back.

Music mode : Digital music data will be played back.

- During the operation, audio signal is output from AV1, AV2, AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminals, but no video signals are output. AV1 and AV2 can output audio signal if "AV1 / AV2 out" is set to "Monitor" in the Setup Menu (p. 34).

- "Date" shows the date on which the recording was made by the recording equipment. The file without record of the date is shown "**/**/****".

Data format for SD Card / USB Flash Memory browsing

- Photo : Still images recorded with digital still cameras compatible with JPEG files of DCF* and EXIF standards Data format - Baseline JPEG (Sub-sampling 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0) Image resolution - 8 × 8 to 30,719 × 17,279 pixels

- Video : SD-Video Standard Ver. 1.2 [MPEG-2 (PS format)] and AVCHD Standard compatible files with an audio format that is either MPEG-1/Layer-2 format or Dolby Digital format (A modified data with a PC may not be displayed correctly.) DivX → p. 83

Music : Data format - MP3 and AAC (Copy-protected files cannot be played back.)

SD Card format : SDXC Card - exFAT

SDHC Card / SD Card - FAT16 or FAT32

● Compliant card type (maximum capacity): SDXC Card (64 GB), SDHC Card (32 GB), SD Card (2 GB), miniSD Card (2 GB) (requiring miniSD adapter)

If miniSD Card is used, insert / remove it together with the adapter.

Check the latest information on the card type at the following website. (English only)

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

USB Flash Memory format : FAT16, FAT32 or exFAT

(A USB HDD formatted by PC is not supported in Media Player.)

*DCF (Design rule for camera file system): Unified standard established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).

Note

  • Format the device with the recording equipment.
    ● The picture may not appear correctly on this TV depending on the recording equipment used.
  • Display may take some time when there are many files and folders.
    ● This function cannot display Motion JPEG or still images that are not JPEG format (i.e. TIFF, BMP).
    ● Data modified with a PC may not be displayed.
    ● Images imported from a PC must be compatible with EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) 2.0, 2.1, and 2.2.
    ● Partly degraded files might be displayed at a reduced resolution.
    ● The folder and file names may be different depending on the digital camera or digital video camera used.
  • Do not use two-byte characters or other special codes.
    ● The device may become unusable with this TV if the file or folder names are changed.

■To insert or remove the SD Card / USB Flash Memory

● For the USB HDD Connection → p. 62

USB Flash Memory
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To insert or remove the SD Card / USB Flash Memory - 1

  • Insert or remove straightly and completely.
    ● Before removing the USB Flash Memory, ensure to perform "Remove the USB device safely" (p. 67)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To insert or remove the SD Card / USB Flash Memory - 2

SD Card

● To insert the SD Card

Gently insert the SD Card label surface facing front.

Push until a click is heard

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - SD Card - 1

text_image Label surface Cutout

● To remove the SD Card

Push the centre of the card-

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - SD Card - 2

● For more information of the SD Card → p. 94

Starting Media Player

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Starting Media Player - 1

natural_image Illustration of a flat-screen monitor with a dashed circular outline on the left side (no text or symbols)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Starting Media Player - 2

Insert the SD Card or USB Flash Memory

- For registered USB HDD, ensure the connection status is "Yes". p. 63

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Insert the SD Card or USB Flash Memory - 1

Switch to Media Player

SD CARD When SD Card is inserted, switching will be done automatically.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Switch to Media Player - 1

Start Media Player

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Start Media Player - 1

text_image Media Player Signal output from all AV terminals will be disabled during Media Player view. Press OK to proceed. Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Start Media Player - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Start Media Player - 3

Select the icon you want to access to

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the icon you want to access to - 1

text_image Mode Player Drive Subtest File Main Refresh Action 3D Core

selected device name

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the icon you want to access to - 2

If two or more devices are not connected, this step will be skipped.

- For the registered USB HDD, all the USB HDD of which the connection status is "Yes" is available.

→ "Register and setup the USB HDD" (p. 63)

To return to TV■
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the icon you want to access to - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the icon you want to access to - 4

Select the content

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the content - 1

text_image Music Player Controls Select + 10% + 20% + 30% Access Photo Video Music 5D Card
  • PhotoPhoto mode" (p. 68) Video ➕ "Video mode" (p. 70)
  • Music ➕ "Music mode" (p. 73)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the content - 2

text_image OK ①select ②access

For registered USB HDD, this step will be skipped and recorded contents list will be displayed. ➤ p. 71

To return to ■ the previous screen
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the content - 3

Change the device

You can change to the other device directly in the same mode if two or more devices are connected.

Display Select "Drive Select" Select the icon you want to access to

the menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the device - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the device - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the device - 3

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Photo Setup Video Setup Music Setup Drive Select Safely remove USB

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the device - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the device - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the device - 6

- Appears if the USB device is connected to the TV.

selected device name

Remove the USB devices safely

Before remove the USB devices, please take the following steps in order to protect the devices.

Display Select "Safely remove USB"

the menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remove the USB devices safely - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remove the USB devices safely - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remove the USB devices safely - 3

text_image VISA Main Menu Picture Sound Photo Setup Video Setup Music Setup Drive Select Safely remove USB

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remove the USB devices safely - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remove the USB devices safely - 5

Select the USB Flash Memory or USB HDD to remove

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remove the USB devices safely - 6

text_image Safely remove USB Product | Name USB Flash Disk | | :| | :| | :| | :| | :| | :|

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Remove the USB devices safely - 7

- Appears if the USB device is connected to the TV.

Using Media Player

Photo mode

Photo mode will read all ".jpg" extension files in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo mode - 1

text_image SD CARD MENU i EXIT OK BACK/RETURN Panasonic TV

To return to TV
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo mode - 2

To return to ■ the previous screen
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo mode - 3

Error display
(images that could not be loaded, etc.)
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo mode - 4

text_image Media Player Photo AI photos USE EXIT ROI Info SD Card Select View Select Change Ads Contents Select

(Thumbnail - All photos) | selected device name

The thumbnail of all the photos on the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed.

You can also access Photo mode directly by using VIERA TOOLS.

→ "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 30)
To change the background music
→ "Photo Setup" (p. 69)

To display the information of the highlighted photo

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo mode - 5

text_image file number / total file number 1/48 File name p1010001.JPG Date 23/10/2000 Size 1600X1200

To change the number of photos on a thumbnail screen at a time

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo mode - 6

To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month

Folder view : Displays the thumbnail grouped by folder

- The files which are not into a folder will be collected to the folder named "/".

Sort by Date : Displays the thumbnail grouped by the same date

●The group of the photos without recorded date is shown as "Unknown".

Sort by Month: Displays the thumbnail grouped by the same month

●The group of the photos without recorded date is shown as "Unknown".

Display the view selection Select the sort type
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["green"] --> B["Folder view"]
    B --> C["Sort by Date"]
    C --> D["Sort by Month"]
    D --> E["②access"]
    D --> F["①select"]

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 2

Select one of the sorted group to display the thumbnail of the selected group
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 3

text_image Audio Player Media Audio by Size 2018.0.3 2018.0.4 2018.0.5 2018.0.6 2018.0.7 2018.0.8 2018.0.9 2018.0.10 2018.0.11 2018.0.12 2018.0.13 Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Audio Audio by Size Audio Video

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 4

●To return to the thumbnail of all photos

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 5

flowchart
graph LR
    A["green"] --> B["②access"]
    B --> C["①select &quot;All photos&quot;"]
    C --> D["OK"]

●To display the information of the highlighted group

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 6

text_image i 1/12 Folder name 23/10/2009 Number of Res 3 group number / total group number folder name, date or month

■Single view - Photos are displayed one at a time.

Select the file from the thumbnail of photos to be viewed

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 7

flowchart
graph TD
    A["① select"] --> B["Single view"]
    C["② access"] --> B
    B --> D["Operation guide"]
    D --> E["Single view (Single view)"]
    E --> F["To display / hide the operation guide"]
    F --> G["i"]
    E --> H["To operate Single view"]
    H --> I["To the previous photo"]
    H --> J["Rotate 90° (anti-clockwise)"]
    H --> K["To the next photo"]
    H --> L["Slideshow"]
    H --> M["Rotate 90° (clockwise)"]
    H --> N["BACK/RETURN"]
    H --> O["To return to thumbnail"]

■ Slideshow - Slideshow will complete when all photos have been viewed within the present thumbnail.

Select the file from the thumbnail of photos for the first view

Start

Slideshow

To display / hide the operation guide → i

● To pause (return to Single view) → OK

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 8

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 9

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 10
red

• To return to thumbnail

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month - 11

Note

● Picture quality may become lower depending on the slideshow settings.
● Picture setting may not work depending on the slideshow settings.

Photo Setup

Choose the settings for Photo mode.

Display the menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 2

Select "Photo Setup" Select the items and set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 6

text_image Photo Setup Menu Back Ground Music Type1 Frame Off Colour Effect Off Transition Effect Fade Aspect Original Interval 5 seconds Repeat On Burst Playback Off

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup - 8

Other items

p. 32, 33, 67, 72 and p. 73

Menu Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)

Photo SetupBack Ground MusicSelects the back ground music during the Photo mode(Off / Type1 / Type2 / Type3 / Auto / User)Type1, Type2 and Type3 are the fixed music each installed in this TV.●Auto: Music data stored in the root folder of the SD Card will be played back randomly.●If there is no available music data, no sound will be produced.User: Music data in the current device registered by yourself in Music mode will be played back.●To register the music ➤ “Set background music for Photo mode” (p. 61)●If no music has been registered or the registered music device are removed, no sound will be produced.
FrameSelects the frame type of the slideshow(Off / Multi / Collage / Drift (+ calendar) / Drift / Gallery (+ calendar) / Gallery / Cinema)Multi: 9 photos are displayed orderly at once.Collage: Each photo is displayed at a random position and random scale.Drift (+ calendar) / Drift: Photos are displayed like flow images.You can select to display the calendar or not. The month of calendar is turned by pressing up or down cursor button.Gallery (+ calendar) / Gallery: The various size of photos in the frame are displayed.You can select to display the calendar or not. The month of calendar is turned by pressing up or down cursor button.Cinema: Photos are displayed like old films (sepia tone)
Colour EffectSelects the colour effect of photos on Single view and Slideshow (Off / Sepia / Gray scale)●This function is not available when “Frame” is set to “Drift”, “Gallery” or “Cinema”.
Transition EffectSelects the transition effect for switching the photo during the slideshow(Off / Fade / Slide / Dissolve / Motion / Random)Fade: The next photo fades in gradually.Slide: The next photo slides and appears from the left side.Dissolve: Each photo is dissolved when switching to the next photo.Motion: Each photo is displayed with an effect of enlarging, reducing, moving up or moving down.Random: Each transition is selected at random.●This function is available when “Frame” is set to “Off”.
AspectSelects whether enlarged or original viewing on Single view and Slideshow (Original / Zoom)●This function is not available when “Frame” is set to “Collage”, “Drift”, “Gallery” or “Cinema”.●This function is not available when “Transition Effect” is set to “Motion”.●Depending on the photo size, it may not be fully enlarged to fill the screen, e.g. portrait style picture.
IntervalSelects slideshow interval (5 / 10 / 15 / 30 / 60 / 90 / 120 seconds)●This function is not available when “Frame” is set to “Drift”, “Gallery” or “Cinema”.●This function is not available when “Transition Effect” is set to “Motion”.
RepeatSlideshow repeat (Off / On)
Burst PlaybackSelects whether the continuous shots are displayed in rapid interval during the slideshow(Off / On)●This function is not available when “Frame” is set to “Drift”, “Gallery” or “Cinema”.●This function is not available when “Transition Effect” is set to “Motion”.

Change the contents

You can switch to the other mode of the Media Player from the thumbnail view.

● The mode can be switched in the current device.
● To change the device → “Change the device” (p. 67)

While the thumbnail is displayed, display the contents selection

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the contents - 1

blue

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the contents - 2

Select the contents

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the contents - 3

text_image MCA Player Photo All pixels Camera Solid FPT Image 107.000 Photo Video Music C-3 Card Movie 20 Image 20 Movie 20 Movie 20

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Change the contents - 4

① select

②access

● Photo → "Photo mode" (p. 68)
● Video → "Video mode" (p. 70)
● Music → "Music mode" (p. 73)

Using Media Player

Video mode

For SD Card or USB Flash Memory

Video mode supports AVCHD, MPEG2 and DivX® file formats.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For SD Card or USB Flash Memory - 1

text_image SD CARD MENU ASPECT EXIT OPTION BACK/RETURN STTL DVDVCR TV Panasonic TV

Film icon will be displayed if the file does not support thumbnail view.

Error display (images that could not be loaded, etc.)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For SD Card or USB Flash Memory - 2

text_image Media Player Video Title view Top Top1 Top2 Top3 Top4 Bottom Bottom1 Bottom2 Bottom3 Bottom4 Bottom5 Bottom6 Bottom7 Bottom8 Bottom9 Bottom10 Bottom11 Bottom12 Bottom13 Bottom14 Bottom15 Bottom16 Bottom17 Bottom18 Bottom19 Bottom20 Bottom21 Bottom22 Bottom23 Bottom24 Bottom25 Bottom26 Bottom27 Bottom28 Bottom29 Bottom30 Bottom31 Bottom32 Bottom33 Bottom34 Bottom35 Bottom36 Bottom37 Bottom38 Bottom39 Bottom40 Bottom41 Bottom42 Bottom43 Bottom44 Bottom45 Bottom46 Bottom47 Bottom48 Bottom49 Bottom50 Bottom51 Bottom52 Bottom53 Bottom54 Bottom55 Bottom56 Bottom57 Bottom58 Bottom59 Bottom60 Bottom61 Bottom62 Bottom63 Bottom64 Bottom65 Bottom66 Bottom67 Bottom68 Bottom69 Bottom70 Bottom71 Bottom72 Bottom73 Bottom74 Bottom75 Bottom76 Bottom77 Bottom78 Bottom79 Bottom80 Bottom81 Bottom82 Bottom83 Bottom84 Bottom85 Bottom86 Bottom87 Bottom88 Bottom89 Bottom90 Bottom91 Bottom92 Bottom93 Bottom94 Bottom95 Bottom96 Bottom97 Bottom98 Bottom99 Bottom100 (Thumbnail - Title view) selected device name

The thumbnail of video titles on the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed. The preview will start when the title is highlighted if it supports a preview.

- You can also access Video mode directly by using VIERA TOOLS

→ "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 30)

• To tüvirdef fhetppë(vjew72)

To display the information of the highlighted title

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For SD Card or USB Flash Memory - 3

text_image file format title number / total title number 1/15 Title 1p1 Date & Time 1942/2009 11:21 Number of scenes 8 Duration 00h15m39s

■Playback from Title view

Playback of the selected title will start. Select the title Start playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from Title view - 1

- DivX contents cannot be played back from Title view. Select DivX folder and press the OK button to display DivX files, and then select one of the file to be played back.

■Playback from the selected scene in the title (AVCHD or MPEG2)

Playback will start from the selected scene to the end of the title. Select the title Select the scene to start playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from the selected scene in the title (AVCHD or MPEG2) - 1

text_image ① select ② access Theta Player Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Theta Θ1.20000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from the selected scene in the title (AVCHD or MPEG2) - 2

text_image ①select ②playback The preview will start when the scene is highlighted if it supports a preview. ●To turn off the preview → "Video Setup" (p. 72)

●To repeat playback → "Video Setup" (p. 72)

To display the information of the highlighted scene

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from the selected scene in the title (AVCHD or MPEG2) - 3

text_image file format scene number / total scene number Scenario Date & Time 19/02/2008 11:21 Duration 00:04m12s

To return to TV■

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To return to TV■ - 1

To return to the previous screen

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To return to the previous screen - 1

Note

The structure of ● titles and scenes may vary depending on the digital video camera used.

■How to operate in the playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 1

text_image Operation guide (Playback) Information banner

- To display / hide the operation guide and information banner - To operate the playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["OK"]
    B --> C["Rewind"]
    B --> D["Pause / Playback"]
    B --> E["Playback"]
    B --> F["Fast forward"]
    B --> G["Stop"]
    H["To the previous scene"] --> I["red"]
    J["To the next scene"] --> K["green"]

●To change aspect (only for the 4:3 video content)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 4

text_image To return to thumbnail → BACK/RETURN You can also use the following buttons. (p. 29) Set the position to "TV" DVD/WCR_TV

●To confirm or change the current status (if available)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 5

text_image OPTION Example: Option Menu Multi Audio Audio1 DvX Subtitle Subtitle1 → ② change ① select

■To change the content in the current device

→ "Change the contents" (p. 69)

For registered USB HDD

Remaining capacity of the HDD

This value may not be accurate depending on the condition.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For registered USB HDD - 1

text_image Media Player USB HDD recordings Remaining Capacity 500GB (50%) Channel Time TitleDate BBC 1 Wed 28/10 12:00 Eastender ITV Sun 10/01 13:30 News BBC 2 Fri 15/01 13:50 Cinema Select EXIT RETURN Play Info USB HDD 1 Delete Content under recording You can playback this content even if under Content not played back Once you playback the content, this icon will dis

Contents list of the registered USB HDD will be displayed. You can also access the contents list directly by using VIERA TOOLS.

→ "How to use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 30)

To display the information of the highlighted content

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For registered USB HDD - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For registered USB HDD - 3

Appears when the recorded content has the guidance information (parental rating, etc.) or the channel of the content is restricted by Child Lock. This content requires entering PIN number to playback.

Playback the content from the list■

Select the content Start playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Playback the content from the list■ - 1
select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Playback the content from the list■ - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Playback the content from the list■ - 3

■ Delete the selected content

Select the content Delete the content

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ Delete the selected content - 1
select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ Delete the selected content - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ Delete the selected content - 3

Confirm

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ Delete the selected content - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ Delete the selected content - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■ Delete the selected content - 6

■How to operate in the playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 1

text_image Operation guide (Playback) Information banner

● To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 2

• To operate the playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 3

Rewind Pause / Playback Playback

Fast forward Stop

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 5

●To display the subtitle (if available)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 8

●You can also use the following buttons. (p. 29)

Set the position to "TV"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 9

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 10

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 11

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 12

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 13

● To confirm or change the current status (if available)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 14

Example:

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 15

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 16

②change ①select

Note

● Depending on the recorded programmes, some playback operations may not work properly.

Using Media Player

You can enjoy the multi-channel sound via an amplifier connected to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

■ To (configplayback)ge the current sound status

Display the Option menu Change the sound (if the video has multiple audio signals)

Example:

OPTION

Multi Audio

change

It may take several seconds to change the sound.

(current sound status)

Audio output settings■

Display the menuSelect “Sound” Select “SPDIF Selection” and set access
MENUSoundselect

set

select

SPDIF Selection

SPDIF : A standard audio transfer file format Selects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal Selection (Auto / PCM)

Auto: Dolby Digital is output as Dolby Digital Bitstream. MPEG is output as PCM.

PCM: Digital output signal is fixed to PCM.

Choose the settings for Video mode.

These settings are not available for the registered USB HDD.

Display the menuSelect “Video Setup” Select “Other Settings”Select the items and set
MENUOther SettingsVideo Preview Repeat
Video Setupaccess
selectset select
● Other items p. 32, 33, 67, 69 and p. 73● Display Settings p. 35● Other items p. 36

Other Settings

Video Preview

Sets to start the preview of the title or scene in the thumbnail screen (Off / On)

- Image may not be displayed for an instant in the thumbnail screen. Set the preview "Off" to resolve this.

Repeat

Playback repeat within the title (Off / On)

- Only the selected file will be repeated for DivX contents.

Music mode

Music mode supports MP3 and AAC file format.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music mode - 1

text_image SD CARD MENU EXIT OK BACK RETURN

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music mode - 2

To return to ■ the previous screen
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music mode - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music mode - 4

text_image Media Player Music Folder view My Music1 My Music2 Access: TEXT Select: 10.1429 Info SD Card Connect to Select/Play First selected device nam

The thumbnail of music folders in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed.

You can also access Music mode directly by using VIERA TOOLS
→ "How to use "VIERA TOOLS" (p. 30)
●To display the information of the highlighted title

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music mode - 5

text_image Folder number / total folder number Folder name My Music 1 Number of files 1/3

■Playback from Folder view

Playback all the files in the selected folder will start.

Select the folder Start playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from Folder view - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from Folder view - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from Folder view - 3

■Playback from File view

Playback of the selected file will start.

Select the folder Select the file to start playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from File view - 1

text_image ①select ②access Radio Player > My Model 1 My Model 1 My Model 2 My Model 3 My Model 4 My Model 5 My Model 6 My Model 7 My Model 8 My Model 9 My Model 10 My Model 11 My Model 12 My Model 13 My Model 14 My Model 15 My Model 16 My Model 17 My Model 18 My Model 19 My Model 20 My Model 21 My Model 22 My Model 23 My Model 24 My Model 25 My Model 26 My Model 27 My Model 28 My Model 29 My Model 30 My Model 31 My Model 32 My Model 33 My Model 34 My Model 35 My Model 36 My Model 37 My Model 38 My Model 39 My Model 40 My Model 41 My Model 42 My Model 43 My Model 44 My Model 45 My Model 46 My Model 47 My Model 48 My Model 49 My Model 50 My Model 51 My Model 52 My Model 53 My Model 54 My Model 55 My Model 56 My Model 57 My Model 58 My Model 59 My Model 60 My Model 61 My Model 62 My Model 63 My Model 64 My Model 65 My Model 66 My Model 67 My Model 68 My Model 69 My Model 70 My Model 71 My Model 72 My Model 73 My Model 74 My Model 75 My Model 76 My Model 77 My Model 78 My Model 79 My Model 80 My Model 81 My Model 82 My Model 83 My Model 84 My Model 85 My Model 86 My Model 87 My Model 88 My Model 89 My Model 90 My Model 91 My Model 92 My Model 93 My Model 94 My Model 95 My Model 96 My Model 97 My Model 98 My Model 99 My Model 100

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from File view - 2

●To display the information of the highlighted title

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Playback from File view - 3

text_image file number / total file number Title My Song_1 Album My Music_1 Artist My Favorite Track No. 1 Duration 00h03m29s

■How to operate in the playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 1

text_image My Song 9 My Favorites My Music 1 00:32.43 / 00:56.44 Operation guide (Playback) information banner

● To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 2

●To operate the playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["OK"] --> B["Rewind"]
    A --> C["II/▶ Pause / Playback"]
    A --> D["Playback"]
    A --> E["Fast forward"]
    A --> F["Stop"]

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 5

●To the previous track
To the next track
●To return to thumbnail

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■How to operate in the playback - 6

■To change the content in the current device

→ "Change the contents" (p. 69)

Music Setup

Setup the setting for Music mode.

Display the menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music Setup - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music Setup - 2

Select "Music Setup" Set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music Setup - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music Setup - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Music Setup - 5

text_image Music Setup Menu Repeat One set

Folder : Playback repeat within the selected folder

One : Playback repeat of the selected one file

Set background music for Photo mode

You can register your favourite music as background music for Photo mode.

- Select "User" in "Back Ground Music" "Photo Setup" (p. 69)

- If you remove the device in which the registered music is stored, the setting of "User" will be reset.

While playing music, display the selection screen

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set background music for Photo mode - 1

Select "File" or "Folder" and set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set background music for Photo mode - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Set background music for Photo mode - 3

File : The current music will be registered as back ground music.

Folder : All the music in the current folder will be registered as back ground music.

Using Network Services

(DLNA / VIERA CAST / freesat)

DLNA®

This TV is a DLNA Certified ^TM product.

DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) is a standard that makes DLNA Certified digital electronics easier and more convenient to use on a home network. To learn more, visit www.dlna.org.

It allows you to share photos and videos stored in the DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC with windows 7 installed, DIGA Recorder etc.) connected to your home network, and enjoy watching them on the TV screen.

■Applicable data format

Photo: JPEG (Sub-sampling 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0) Image resolution - 8 × 8 to 30,719 × 17,279 pixels MOTION JPEG and Progressive JPEG are not supported.

Video : MPEG-2 (PS format and TS format)

● AVCHD and DivX files are not supported by DLNA, but can be played by Media Player (p. 70).

● Music files are not supported by DLNA, but MP3 and AAC files can be played back by Media Player (p. 73).

Media server

Ensure the connected equipment has a DLNA Certified media server.

To use the PC, install the server software on the PC for obtaining a media server.

Store photos or videos into the media server, and then you can watch them on the TV.

"TwonkyMedia server 5.1.x" and "Windows 7" are the server software that has been tested for the performance with this TV (current as of January, 2010).

For installing, read the manual of the server software.

The DLNA control function of Windows 7 is not supported with this TV.

- When a server software for the media server is installed on the PC, the data may be at risk of being accessed by other people. Please take care of the settings and connections under the network circumstances at the office, hotel or even at home when not using a router.

By connecting a DLNA compatible DIGA Recorder to your home network, you can enjoy and control it as one of the media servers.

For details, read the manual of the DIGA Recorder.

Network connection

Example 1 or Example 2 in "Network connections" (p. 75)

Network setup

→ p. 76 - 79

■DLNA operations

→ p. 80 - 82

VIERA CAST™

VIERA CAST is a gateway to the internet services unique to Panasonic.

By connecting the TV to the internet environment, VIERA CAST allows you to enjoy internet content on the TV screen such as photos, videos, weather, etc. from VIERA CAST home screen.

You can access VIERA CAST home screen directly by pressing the VIERA CAST button on the remote control.

■Network connection

Example 1 or Example 3 in "Network connections" (p. 75)

Network setup

→ p. 76 - 79

■VIERA CAST operations

→ p. 83

freesat

freesat will give you access to the great interactive services and features through an internet connection.

- Please contact broadcasters for availability of services.

Network connections

To use only DLNA features, you can operate the features without Broadband network environment. To use VIERA CAST features or freesat interactive services, you need a Broadband network environment.

- If you do not have a Broadband network services, please consult your retailer for assistance.

- Confirm the terms and conditions of the contracts with your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telecommunications company.

Set up and connect any equipment required for the network environment.

● Required speed (effective): at least 1.5 Mbps for SD and 6 Mbps for HD picture quality, respectively.

Read the manual of the network equipment, too.

Example 1
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network connections - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Computer"] --> B["Ethernet"]
    B --> C["LAN cable (Shielded)"]
    C --> D["Modem"]
    D --> E["Internet"]
    F["USB2"] --> G["Switch"]
    G --> H["Router"]
    H --> I["Hub, Router or Access point"]
    I --> J["DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC, DIGA Recorder, etc.)"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Ensure to use a LAN straight cable for this connection.

If your modem has no broadband router functions, use a broadband router.

If your modem has broadband router functions but there are no vacant ports, use a hub.

  • Ensure that the Broadband routers and hubs are compatible with 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX.
  • If you use the equipment compatible only with 100BASE-TX, category 5 LAN cables are required.

Example 2

You can connect the TV and the equipment directly to use DLNA features.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Example 2 - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["ETHERNET"]
    B --> C["LAN cable (Shielded)"]
    C --> D["Computer"]
    D --> E["DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC, DIGA Recorder, etc.)"]

- Ensure to use a LAN cross cable for this connection.

Example 3

You can connect the TV and the telecommunication equipment directly to use VIERA CAST features.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Example 3 - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Ethernet"]
    B --> C["LAN cable (Shielded)"]
    C --> D["Modem"]
    D --> E["Internet"]

Note

  • Depending on the ISP or telecommunications company, the required equipment and the internet connection procedure are different. Ensure that you use the network equipment that are authorized by your ISP and telecommunications company.
  • You cannot make settings for the network equipment on this TV. You may be required to make settings on your computer.
  • Depending on the terms and conditions of the contracts with your ISP or telecommunications company, additional fees may be charged or multiple connections to the internet may be impossible.
  • Please contact your ISP or telecommunications company if you require further assistance regarding the network equipment.

Using Network Services

(DLNA / VIERA CAST / freesat)

Network Setup

- Ensure the connections are completed before starting Network Setup.

→ "Network connections" (p. 75)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network Setup - 1

text_image 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select "Setup" VISTA Main Menu Picture Sound Setup ②access ①select 3 Select "Network Setup" Setup Menu 1/2 Timer Programming Off Timer Off USB HDD Setup Link Settings Child Lock freesat Tuning Menu Other Sat. Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup ②access ①select 4 Set To return to TV EXIT

Edit the name of this TV

You can set your favourite name for this TV. This name will be used to display the name of this TV on the screen of the other DLNA compatible equipment.

Select "VIERA Name"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Edit the name of this TV - 1

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wired Access Point Settings --- IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Edit the name of this TV - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Edit the name of this TV - 3

Edit the name Set characters one by one

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Edit the name of this TV - 4

text_image VIERA Name Name A D C L S S B I K L M N U W X Y Z R 2 F G S + - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A L C = I U I J K L M N P Q R S T U W X Y Z S = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 P Q R S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T Q S T O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A O A

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Edit the name of this TV - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Edit the name of this TV - 6

Store

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Edit the name of this TV - 7

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

Update TV's software

Accesses the specific web site to update TV's software and search if any software updates are available. Select "Software Update"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Update TV's software - 1

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wired Access Point Settings --- IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIFRA Name VIFRA Software Update Access MAC Address(ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Update TV's software - 2

- Follow the on screen instructions

Note

MAC Address

● MAC address is a unique address that identifies hardware in the network. (for information only)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - MAC Address - 1

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wired Access Point Settings — IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIFRA Name VIFRA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

Network settings for the LAN Cable connection

This setting is for the network connection by using the LAN cable.

① Select “Network Type” and set to “Wired”

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the LAN Cable connection - 1

text_image Network Setup Network Type Access Point Settings IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-af-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the LAN Cable connection - 2

If you make the network connection like "Example2" (p. 63), you do not have to set "Acquire DNS Address", "Proxy" and "Proxy Port".

② Select "IP/DNS Settings" and set the items

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the LAN Cable connection - 3

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wired Access Point Settings IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIFRA Name VIFRA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-a'-gh-j-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the LAN Cable connection - 4

After settings, return to "Network Setup" screen

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the LAN Cable connection - 5

Acquire IP Address ■ Acquire DNS Address ■

Sets IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Primary DNS and Secondary DNS.

For most users, the recommended method of connection to your network is by using Auto feature.

Select "Acquire IP Address" and then set to "Auto"

Select "Acquire DNS Address" and then set to "Auto"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Acquire IP Address ■ Acquire DNS Address ■ - 1

text_image IP/DNS Settings Acquire IP Address Auto IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Acquire DNS Address Primary DNS Secondary DNS

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Acquire IP Address ■ Acquire DNS Address ■ - 2

● The available settings are displayed automatically.

Manual settings

If you wish to set these functions manually, select "Manual".

Select "IP Address", "Subnet

Move the cursor and

Mask", "Gateway", "Primary

enter the number

DNS" or "Secondary DNS"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Manual settings - 1
-select

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Manual settings - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Manual settings - 3
move

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Manual settings - 4
0

③ Select "Proxy Settings" and set the items

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Manual settings - 5

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wired Access Point Settings IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Access Connection Test VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Manual settings - 6

After settings, return to "Network Setup" screen

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Manual settings - 7

Proxy

Sets Proxy address.

- This is the address of the relay server that is connected to the target server instead of the browser and sends data to the browser. Setting is required if specified by the provider.

Select "Proxy"
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Proxy - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Proxy - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Proxy - 3

Enter the address
Set characters one by one
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Proxy - 4

text_image Proxy Host A J C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 B W X Y Z - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X Y Z + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - B W X YZ + - - A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z W b c d f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c d f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c d f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c d f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c d f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c d f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h ij k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n u p r x i W b c D f g h i j k l m n v w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Proxy - 5

Store
BACK!
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Proxy - 6

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

■Proxy Port

Sets Proxy port number.

● This number is also specified by the provider with the Proxy address.

Select "Proxy Port"
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 3

Move the cursor and enter the number
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 4

④ Select "Connection Test" and access to test

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 5

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wired Access Point Settings IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test Access VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-af-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Proxy Port - 8

: succeeded

The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

: failed

Check the settings and connections, and then perform this function again.

Performs automatic testing of the network connection for the TV. (It takes a while to test.)

Using Network Services

(DLNA / VIERA CAST / freesat)

Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection

This setting is for the network connection by using Wireless LAN Adaptor. (Wireless LAN connection) ① Select “Network Type” and set to “Wireless”

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 1

text_image Network Setup Network Type Access Point Settings No settings IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 2

② Select "Access Point Settings"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 3

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wireless Access Point Settings No settings IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 4

③ Select the connection type and set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 5

text_image Connection Type Please select network connection type. WPS(Push button) WPS(PIN) Search for access point Manual

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 6

For details of each connection type ➤ p. 79

After settings, return to "Network Setup" screen → OK

④ Confirm the connection status of “Access Point Settings”

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 7

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wireless Access Point Settings Connected IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

- - - : "Wired" is selected in "Network Type".

No adaptor : Wireless LAN Adaptor is not connected.

No settings : Setting for connecting to the access point has not been set.

Connecting... : Connecting to the access point in progress.

Connected : Wireless LAN connection to the access point succeeded.

● To display the current access point settings, press the OK button.

To change the settings, select "No" on this screen.

Some access points do not allow access to the internet.

Perform "Connection Test" (below) to check if internet connection is available.

USB

overcurrent : Overcurrent error p. 101

⑤ Select "Connection Test" and access to test

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 8

text_image Network Setup Network Type Wireless Access Point Settings Connected IP/DNS Settings Proxy Settings Connection Test Access VIERA Name VIERA Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 9

Performs automatic testing of the network connection for the TV. (This may take some time.)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Network settings for the Wireless LAN connection - 10

: succeeded

The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

: failed

Check the settings and connections, and then perform this function again.

If you continue to have difficulty, please contact your internet service provider.

WPS(Push button)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(Push button) - 1

text_image WPS(Push button) 1) Please press the 'WPS' button on the access point until its light flashes. 2) When light is flashing select 'Connect' on TV. If you are unsure, please check the instruction manual of the access point. Connect

Press the WPS button on the access point until the light flashes.

And then, press the OK button to connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor and the access point.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(Push button) - 2

Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup.

WPS: Wi-Fi Protected Setup

Search for access point■

Access points found automatically are listed.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 1

Select your desired access point

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 2

To search access points again

For the information of the highlighted access point

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 4

text_image Encryption Key Setting Connection will be made with the following settings: SSID : Access Point A Authentication type : WPA-PSK Encryption type : TKIP Please input the encryption key. Encryption key

- : Encrypted access point

Access the encryption key input mode

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 5

- If the selected access point is not encrypted, the confirmation screen will be displayed. It is recommended to select the encrypted access point.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 6

text_image Access Point Settings Encryption key 1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Z - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + V X Y Z Z Z - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 + 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 + 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Enter the encryption key of the access point

Set characters one by one

Store

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 8

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 9

●You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 96)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 10

Select "Yes"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Search for access point■ - 11

●To re-enter the encryption key, select "No".

WPS(PIN)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(PIN) - 1

Select your desired access point

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(PIN) - 2

- Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup. To search access points again

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(PIN) - 3

For the information of the highlighted access point

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(PIN) - 4

To set manually → red

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(PIN) - 5

text_image WPS(PIN) Please register the following PIN codes on the access point. PIN code : 12345678 Select 'Connect' after entering and saving settings on the access point. Connect

Enter the PIN code to the access point, and then select "Connect"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - WPS(PIN) - 6

■Manual

You can setup SSID, authentication type, encryption type, and encryption key manually. Follow the on screen instructions and set manually.

- When you use 11n (5GHz) for the wireless system between the Wireless LAN Adaptor and access point, please select "AES" for the encryption type.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Manual - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Manual - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Manual - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Manual - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Manual - 5

text_image Authentication Type Settings Connection will be made with the following settings:- SSID : XXXXXXX Please select the authentication type. WPA2-PSK WPA PSK Shared key Open

Using Network Services

(DLNA / VIERA CAST / freesat)

Using DLNA® features

- Ensure the preparation of media server, network connections and network settings are completed.

→ "Media server" (p. 74), "Network connections" (p. 75), "Network Setup" (p. 76 - 79)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Using DLNA® features - 1

Display the Input select menu

AV

Select "Media Server"

- You can also access directly by using VIERA TOOLS -> "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 30)

Select one of the media servers you want to access

To display the information of the highlighted media server → i or blue Total listed number

Select the file (photo or video) to be viewed

- Depending on the conditions of media server, you may need to select the folder before selecting the file. - To display the information of the highlighted file → i or blue

To return to TV

To return to ■ the previous screen

For photo file

Single view
- Photos are displayed one at a time.
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For photo file - 1

text_image Single view Option EXIT Select RETURN Connection Operation guide (Single view)

To display / hide the operation guide ⓘ

To operate Single view

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For photo file - 2

text_image To the previous photo Rotate 90° (anti-clockwise) To the next photo Slideshow Rotate 90° (clockwise)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For photo file - 3

■ Slideshow - Slideshow will be started from the selected photo file and completed within the list.

Start Slideshow
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For photo file - 4

To display / hide the operation guide ➕ ⓘ

To pause (return to Single view) OK

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For photo file - 5

For video file

Playback ■
- Playback will start.
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For video file - 1

text_image Operation guide (Playback) Information banner

● To display / hide the operation guide and information banner → ⓘ

●To operate the playback

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For video file - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["OK"] --> B["Rewind"]
    A --> C["Pause / Playback"]
    A --> D["Playback"]
    A --> E["Fast forward"]
    A --> F["Stop"]

● To the previous scene → red

To the next scene → green

●To change aspect (only for the 4:3 video content)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - For video file - 3

For DIGA Recorder

■Control the DIGA Recorder

The screen of the DIGA Recorder will be displayed. You can control the functions of the DIGA Recorder with this TV remote control according to the operation guide.

● Before operating, register this TV on the DIGA Recorder.
- For details, read the manual of the DIGA Recorder.

Example:
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■Control the DIGA Recorder - 1

text_image DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Files) All Not Covered Mode Bus/Outdoors Sports Video (AVCH) Libert TV 10.00/Pass Journal Talkers / Make WCT 10.00/Pass Siber TV das Gesprön 10.00/Pass Start Time 1:01 - Take 27 VOR Accesion 10.00/Pass VOR aktual VOR Accidental 10.00/Pass VOR aktual P ON RETURN OPTION Page 06/2005 OK

Note

●You may select and playback the music file.
● Non-playable files are also listed but cannot be selected.
● Turn the TV off, and then on again when changing or reconnecting the network connection.

Using Network Services

(DLNA / VIERA CAST / freesat)

Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents)

Choose the settings for Photo and Video file operations.

Display

the

menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 4

Other items

p. 32, 33, 35, 36 and p. 73

Select the items and set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 5

Select "Other Settings" Select the items and set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Photo Setup (for photo contents) and Video Setup (for video contents) - 8

MenuItem Adjustments/ Configurations (alternatives)
Photo SetupBack Ground MusicSelects the back ground music while photo (Off / Type1 / Type2 / Type3 / User)Type1, Type2 and Type3 are the fixed music each installed in this TV.●User: Music data registered by yourself in Music mode will be played back.●To register the music ➔ “Set background music for Photo mode” (p. 61)●Only available music files can be registered.●If no music has been registered, or you change to the other media server, no sound will be produced.
Transition EffectSelects the transition effect for switching the photo during the slideshow(Off / Fade / Slide / Dissolve / Motion / Random)Fade : The next photo fades in gradually.Slide : The next photo slides and appears from the left side.Dissolve: The photo is replaced by an indefinite block unit.Motion : The photo is replaced with enlarged, reduced, moved up or moved down.Random: Each transition is selected at random.
IntervalSelects slideshow interval (5 / 10 / 15 / 30 / 60 / 90 / 120 seconds)●This function is not available when “Transition Effect” is set to “Motion”.
RepeatSlideshow repeat (Off / On)
Video SetupOther SettingsVideo PreviewSets to start the preview of the title or scene in the thumbnail screen (Off / On)●Image may not be displayed for an instant in the thumbnail screen. Set the preview “Off” to resolve this.
RepeatPlayback repeat within the title (Off / On)

Sound Settings (for video contents)

You can enjoy the multi-channel sound via an amplifier connected to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

■ To confirm or change the current sound status(during playback)

Display the Option menu

Change the sound (if the video has multiple audio signals)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 1

Example:

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 2

(current sound status)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 4

-change

- It may take several seconds to change the sound.

■Audio output settings

Display

the menu

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 6

Select "Sound"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 7

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 8

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 9

Select "SPDIF Selection" and set

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 10

text_image Sound Menu 1/2 Mode Music Bass Trabe Balance Headphone Volume Surround Off Volume Correction Speaker Distance to Wall Over 30cm SPDIF Selection Auto

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Sound Settings (for video contents) - 11

MenuItemAdjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
SpunSPDIF SelectionSPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (Auto / PCM)Auto: Dolby Digital is output as Dolby Digital Bitstream. MPEG is output as PCM.PCM: Digital output signal is fixed to PCM.

VIERA CAST™

You can access a selection of internet services from VIERA CAST home screen. For example, YouTube, Picasa Web Albums (current as of March, 2010).

● VIERA CAST requires a broadband internet connection. Dial-up internet connections cannot be used.

Ensure the network connections and network settings are completed.

→ "Network connections" (p. 75), "Network Setup" (p. 76 - 79)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - VIERA CAST™ - 1

text_image VIEW CAST EXIT OK BACK RETURN 1 2 abcdef 3 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 8 tuvpqrs wxyz 0

To return to TV
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - VIERA CAST™ - 2

Access VIERA CAST

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Access VIERA CAST - 1

Depending on the usage conditions, it may take a while to read all the data.

Example:
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Access VIERA CAST - 2

Please read these instructions carefully and follow the on screen instructions.

Example:
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Access VIERA CAST - 3

text_image Dailymotion Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this Make this

VIERA CAST home screen

Video communication (ex. Skype™) requires an exclusive Communication Camera TY-CC10W (optional accessory p. 6). For details, read the manual of the Communication Camera.

■How to operate VIERA CAST (current as of March, 2010)

● To go to the next level → Select "MORE"
● To back to the previous level → Select "BACK"
● To move the cursor / select the item → (◀ OK ▶)
To access → OK
- To return to the previous screen → RETURN
● To return to VIERA CAST home screen → VIERA CAST
- When the key words are displayed on colour bar → red green yellow blue
- When options with numbers are displayed → 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

  • Setup & Help menu (Items in the "Setup & Help" may change without notice.)
Customize HomeScreenChanges the position of each services on VIERA CAST home screen
My AccountConfirms or removes the account information of the TV you entered on VIERA CAST
LockSets to restrict access to some services
BeepSets beep sound On or Off when operating VIERA CAST
NoticesDisplays the information of VIERA CAST
HelpExplains the setup items and operations in VIERA CAST

USB Keyboard

You can input characters on VIERA CAST screen by using the USB Keyboard connected to the USB port.

  • You cannot use two or more keyboards simultaneously.
    • The USB Keyboard which requires the driver is not supported.
    To change the language type "USB Keyboard Layout" (p. 36)

Note

  • Be sure to update the software when a software update notice is displayed on the TV screen. If the software is not updated, you will not be able to use VIERA CAST.
    You can update the software later manually → "Software Update" in the Network Setup Menu (p. 76)
  • VIERA CAST™ home screen is subject to change without notice.
    The services through VIERA CAST™ are operated by their respective service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily or permanently without notice. Therefore, Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the continuity of the services.
    ● All features of websites or content of the service may not be available.
  • Some content may be inappropriate for some viewers.
    Some content may only be available for specific countries and may be presented in specific languages.
    ● Depending on the connection environment, the internet connection may be slow or may not be successful.
  • During the operation, audio signal is output from AV1, AV2, AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminals. But no video signals are output. AV1 and AV2 can output audio signal if "AV1 / AV2 out" is set to "Monitor" in the Setup Menu (p. 34).
    ●You can set to restrict using VIERA CAST→“Child Lock” (p. 54)
    ●Turn the TV off, and then on again when changing or reconnecting the network connection.

Q-Link connects the TV and DVD Recorder / VCR, and enables easy recording, playback, etc. (p. 86) VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) connects the TV and the equipment with VIERA Link function, and enables easy control, convenient recording, playback, energy saving, creation of a home theatre, etc., without complicated setting. (p. 87 - 91)

You can use Q-Link and VIERA Link functions together.

  • This TV supports "HDAVI Control 5" function. But available features are depending on the connected equipment's version of HDAVI Control. Please refer to the manual of the equipment to confirm the version.
  • VIERA Link features may be available even with other manufacturers' equipment supporting HDMI CEC.

Q-Link (SCART connection only)

Features\Connected equipmentDVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link functionConnection
Analogue channel downloadPANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 1PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 2PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 3
Easy playback
Power on linkUse a fully wired SCART cable.●Connect the DVD Recorder / VCR supporting Q-Link to the TV's AV1 or AV2 terminal via a SCART cable.
Power off link
Direct TV Recording

VIERA Link (HDMI connection only)

Features\Connected equipmentDIGA Recorder with VIERA Link functionDVD Player / Blu-ray Disc Player with VIERA Link functionHD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function
Analogue channel download---
Easy playback
Power on link
Power off link
Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby○*3○*3-
Auto standby for unnecessary equipment○*3○*3-
Pause Live TV programme○*3--
Direct TV Recording○*3--
Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control○*1○*1○*1
Speaker control---

Connection
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 7

DIGA Recorder / DVD Player / Blu-ray Disc Player / HD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function

Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.

  • Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 terminal via an HDMI cable.
  • For information about using HDMI cables for connecting Panasonic HD Video Camera or LUMIX Camera, read the manual of the equipment.

VIERA Link (HDMI and SCART connections)

Features\Connected equipmentDIGA Recorder with VIERA Link functionConnectionPANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 8 PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 9 PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 10SCART cableUse a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.●Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link ●to the TV's HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 terminal via an HDMI cable.Use a fully wired SCART cable.●Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's AV1 or AV2 terminal via a SCART cable.
Analogue channel download
Easy playback
Power on link
Power off link
Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby○*3
Auto standby for unnecessary equipment○*3
Pause Live TV programme○*2*4
Direct TV Recording○*2
Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control○*1
Speaker control-

VIERA Link (HDMI and Audio out connections)

Features\Connected equipmentPlayer theatre with VIERA Link functionBlu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link functionAmplifier with VIERA Link function
Analogue channel download---
Easy playback *5 *5 -
Power on link-
Power off link
Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby- *3 -
Auto standby for unnecessary equipment *3 *6 *3 *6 *3
Pause Live TV programme ---
Direct TV Recording ---
Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control *1 *1 -
Speaker control

Connection
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 11

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Computer"] --> B["HDMI cable"]
    B <--> C["Speaker system"]
    C --> D["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
    D --> E["Optical digital audio cable or RCA cable or SCART cable"]
    E --> F["*7"]

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 12

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Computer"] -->|HDMI cable| B["HDMI cable"]
    B --> C["Speaker system"]
    C --> D["Amplifier with VIERA Link function"]
    D --> E["DIGA Recorder with VIERA Link function"]
    E --> F["SCART cable"]
    F --> G["Optical digital audio cable or RCA cable or SCART cable"]
    G --> H["HD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function"]
    H --> I["HDMI cable"]
    I --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
- Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 terminal via an HDMI cable.
Use a fully wired SCART cable.
- If you use a SCART cable for audio output, connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's AV1 or AV2 terminal and set "AV1 / AV2 out" to "Monitor" in the Setup Menu (p. 34).
- Use any one of the optical digital audio cable, RCA cable and SCART cable for audio output from the TV.

*1: Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 2 or later" function.
*2: Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 3 or later" function.
*3: Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 4 or later" function.
*4: Available with DIGA Recorder which has HDD.
*5: while playingback a disc
*6: except for watching a disc
*7: If the connected equipment has "HDAVI Control 5" function, you do not have to use this audio cable (Optical digital audio cable, RCA cable or SCART cable). In this case, connect the equipment to the TV's HDMI2 terminal via an HDMI cable.

- Table below displays maximum number of compatible equipment that can be controlled by VIERA Link Control. This includes connections to equipment already connected to the TV.

For example, DIGA Recorder connected to Amplifier which is connected to the TV via an HDMI cable.

Type of the equipmentMaximum number
Recorder (DIGA Recorder, etc.)3
Player (DVD Player, Blu-ray Disc Player, HD Video Camera, LUMIX Camera, Digital Camera, Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre, etc.)3
Audio system (Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre, Amplifier, etc.)1
Tuner (Set top box, etc.)4

Preparations

Connect the DVD Recorder / VCR with the following logos:

"Q-Link", "NEXTVIEWLINK", "DATA LOGIC", "Easy Link", "Megalogic" or "SMARTLINK"

Q-Link connection p. 84

Use fully wired SCART cable.

Set up the DVD Recorder / VCR. Read the manual of the recorder.

● Q-Link terminal setup in the Setup Menu → "Q-Link" (p. 34), "AV1 / AV2 out" (p. 34)
- Download Analogue channel setting "Analogue channel download" (see below)

Features available

Analogue channel download

Analogue channel settings can be downloaded to a recorder with an analogue tuner (where Analogue is still broadcast). Digital channel settings are not downloaded.

- To download the Analogue channel settings "Q-Link Download" (p. 34) or "Auto Setup" in Analogue mode (p. 41) or "Auto Setup" - when first using the TV (p. 12)

Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record

Recording the current programme on a DVD Recorder / VCR immediately.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record - 1

text_image DIRECT TV REC EXIT GUIDE DIRECT TV REC

● Available conditions:

Picture sourceModeRecording from
AnalogueTVTV monitor out
AVRecorder's tuner
freesat, DVB, Other Sat.TVTV monitor out
AV(watching recorder's tuner)AVRecorder's tuner
AV(watching recorder's external input)AVRecorder's external input
AV(watching TV's external input)AVTV monitor out
  • When Direct TV Recording is performed, the recorder is automatically turned on if it is in Standby mode.
  • Changing channel or turning off the TV is available while the recorder is recording from its own tuner.
  • Changing channel is not available while the recorder is recording from the TV tuner.

■To stop recording

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To stop recording - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["GUIDE"] --> B["Unlock the tuner"]
    B --> C["Tuner Locked\nPress EXIT to unlock and stop recording"]
    C --> D["Continue"]
    C --> E["Unlock"]
    F["EXIT"] --> G["●"]

When the DVD Recorder / VCR starts playback or the direct navigator / function menu for the equipment is activated, the TV is turned on and the input mode is switched automatically so that you can view the content. (Only when the TV is in Standby mode.)

When the TV is set to Standby mode, the recorder is also automatically set to Standby. (Only when the videocassette or disc is not active.)

● This function will work even if the TV enters Standby mode automatically by auto power standby function.

• "DATA LOGIC" (a trademark of Metz Corporation)
- "Easy Link" (a trademark of Philips Corporation)

Note

- Some recorders are not compatible. Read the manual of the recorder.

• "Megalogic" (a trademark of Grundig Corporation)
- "SMARTLINK" (a trademark of Sony Corporation)

*

*Enjoy additional HDMI Inter-Operability with Panasonic products which have “HDAVI Control” function. This TV supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.

Connections to the equipment (DIGA Recorder, HD Video Camera, Player theatre, Amplifier, etc.) with HDMI and SCART cables allow you to interface them automatically (p. 84 and p. 85).

These features are limited to models incorporating "HDAVI Control" and "VIERA Link".

Some functions are not available depending on the equipment's version of HDAVI Control. Please confirm the connected equipment's version of HDAVI Control.
- VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
- Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers' equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
- For information about applicable Panasonic equipment, consult your local Panasonic dealer or refer to www.panasonic.co.uk

Preparations

Connect the equipment that supports VIERA Link.

VIERA Link connection ➤ p. 84 and p. 85

Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable. Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.

Recommended Panasonic HDMI cables' part numbers:

RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m)•

RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m)•

RP-CDHS50 (5.0

  • Use a fully wired SCART cable.
  • Set up the connected equipment. Read the manual of the equipment.
  • For optimal recording, the settings of the recorder may need to be changed. For details, read the manual of the recorder.
  • Download Analogue channel setting "Analogue channel download" (see below)
  • Set VIERA Link On in the Setup Menu "VIERA Link" (p. 34)
  • Set up the TV

After connection, turn the equipment on and then switch the TV on.

Select the input mode to HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 (p. 28), and make sure that an image is displayed correctly.

This setup should be done each time when the following conditions occur:

• for the first time
- when adding or reconnecting equipment
- when changing setup

■Features available

Analogue channel download

Analogue channel settings can be downloaded to a recorder with an analogue tuner (where Analogue is still broadcast). Digital channel settings are not downloaded.

- To download the Analogue channel settings "Q-Link Download" (p. 34) or "Auto Setup" in Analogue mode (p. 41) or "Auto Setup" - when first using the TV (p. 12)

Easy playback

Automatic Input switching - When the connected equipment is operated (during playback or menu operations, etc.), the input mode is switched automatically. When playback is stopped or menus are exited, the input mode returns to the original setting.

When the connected equipment starts playback or the direct navigator / function menu for the equipment is activated, the TV is automatically turned on and the input mode is switched automatically so that you can view the content. (Only when the TV is in Standby mode.)

When the TV is set to Standby mode, the connected equipment is also automatically set to Standby.

- This function will work even if the TV enters Standby mode automatically by auto power standby function.

■Features available

Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby Standby Power Save

Set Standby Power Save "On" in the Setup Menu to use this function

→ "Standby Power Save" (p. 34)

The power consumption in Standby mode of the connected equipment is controlled in synchronization with the TV On / Off state.

When the TV is set to Standby mode, the connected equipment is automatically set to Standby and the power consumption in Standby mode of the connected equipment is automatically minimized.

When the TV is turned on and the connected equipment is still in Standby mode, the power consumption of the connected equipment is increased to reduce the startup time.

- This function is effective if the connected equipment can change the power consumption in Standby mode and is set to higher consumption.

Auto standby for unnecessary equipment Intelligent Auto Standby

Set Intelligent Auto Standby "On (With reminder)" or "On (No reminder)" in the Setup Menu to use this function

→ "Intelligent Auto Standby" (p. 34)

When the TV is On, non-watched or non-used connected equipment goes into Standby mode automatically to reduce power consumption. For example, when the input mode is switched from HDMI, the connected equipment will go into Standby mode / when Speaker Selection is changed to "TV", the Player theatre will go into Standby mode (except when watching a disc).

  • If you select "On (With reminder)", the on screen message will be displayed before the connected equipment turns to Standby.
  • This function may not work properly depending on the connected equipment. If required, set to "Off".

Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record Direct TV Rec

Recording the current programme on a DIGA Recorder immediately.

  • If you connect a variety of recorders including other manufacturers' recorders at the same time, please connect the DIGA Recorder to the TV's lower HDMI terminal number. For example, if you use HDMI1 and HDMI2 for two recorders, connect the DIGA Recorder to HDMI1.
    If Direct TV Recording does not operate, check the settings and the equipment
    “Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features” (p. 84 and p. 85), “Preparations” (p. 87)
  • If you wish to record a programme that the DIGA Recorder does not support, a SCART connection is required and the programme is recorded by Q-Link function (p. 86).
    Depending on the programme, a SCART connection may be required to record.
  • Changing channel or turning off the TV is available while the recorder is recording from its own tuner. Changing channel is not available while the recorder is recording from the TV tuner.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record Direct TV Rec - 1

text_image DIRECT TV REC EXIT VIERA Lock GUIDE OK

Display "VIERA Link Menu"

Select "Direct TV Rec" and start recording
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record Direct TV Rec - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record Direct TV Rec - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record Direct TV Rec - 4

You can also start recording directly

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record Direct TV Rec - 5

To stop recording

Select "Stop" in "Direct TV Rec" and access

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To stop recording - 1

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Stop VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To stop recording - 2

You can also stop recording directly.

Unlock the tuner

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To stop recording - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To stop recording - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To stop recording - 5

text_image Tuner Locked Press EXIT to unlock and stop recording Continue Unlock

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To stop recording - 6

■Features available (Using VIERA Link Menu)

Pause Live TV programme Pause Live TV

You can pause the live TV programme and resume the programme later.

The live TV programme will be recorded on HDD of the connected DIGA Recorder.

This function is available with a DIGA Recorder which has HDD.

- If you connect a variety of recorders including other manufacturers' recorders at the same time, please connect the DIGA Recorder which has HDD to the TV's lower HDMI terminal number. For example, if you use HDMI1 and HDMI2 for two recorders, connect the DIGA Recorder which has HDD to HDMI1.

If Pause Live TV does not operate, check the settings and the equipment

“Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features” (p. 84 and p. 85), “Preparations” (p. 87)

Access and pause the live TV programme

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Access and pause the live TV programme - 1

text_image INPUT TV VIERA Link OK OPTION 1 2 Panasonic TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display "VIERA Link Menu" - 1

Select "Pause Live TV" and pause

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Pause Live TV" and pause - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Pause Live TV" and pause - 2

The TV picture will be paused.

You can also pause directly by using VIERA TOOLS

→ "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 30)

Live TV programme is recorded on HDD from where it was paused.

If the paused TV picture disappears after a few minutes

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select "Pause Live TV" and pause - 3

● Follow the operation guide to operate Pause Live TV function.

To operate Pause Live TV

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - To operate Pause Live TV - 1

text_image search backward pause search forward OK playback stop

● Operations may be different depending on the recorder. In this case, follow the operation guide or read the manual of the recorder.

- If you stop playback, the recorded programme will be deleted from HDD.

■To return to Live TV

(stop playback of Pause Live TV / cancel pause)

Select "Yes"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To return to Live TV - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To return to Live TV - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■To return to Live TV - 3

- If you stop playback or cancel pause, the recorded programme will be deleted from HDD.

Features available ■ (Using VIERA Link Menu)

Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control

You can control some functions of the connected equipment with this TV remote control (point the remote control at the TV's signal receiver).

  • If you cannot operate the menu of the connected equipment, check the settings and the equipment
    "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 84 and p. 85), "Preparations" (p. 87)
  • For details of the operations for the connected equipment, read the manual of the equipment.

Access and operate the menu of the equipment
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - VIERA Link Control - 1

text_image 1 2 3 VIERA Link OK

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display "VIERA Link Menu" - 1

Select "VIERA Link Control"
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display "VIERA Link Menu" - 2

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Display "VIERA Link Menu" - 3

Select the equipment you want to access

The type of the connected equipment is displayed. Select the type of the equipment and access.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the equipment you want to access - 1

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the equipment you want to access - 2
Recorder / Player / Home Cinema / Video Camera / LUMIX / Digital Camera / Other

You can also access directly by using VIERA TOOLS

→ "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 30)

The displayed item may vary depending on the connected equipment.

"Home Cinema" means Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Recorder theatre.

"Other" means Tuner set top box.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Select the equipment you want to access - 3

The menu of the accessed equipment (Input mode will be changed automatically)

Operate the menu of the equipment

Available VIERA remote control buttons: (depending on the connected equipment)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Operate the menu of the equipment - 1

If multiple recorders or ■ players are connected

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - If multiple recorders or ■ players are connected - 1

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder2 Speaker Selection Home Cinema

Recorder1-3 / Player1-3

The number is given from the TV's lower HDMI terminal number connected to the same type equipment. For example, two recorders to HDMI2 and HDMI3, in this case the recorder connected to HDMI2 is displayed as "Recorder1", and the recorder connected to HDMI3 is displayed as "Recorder2".

If you access ■

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - non-VIERA Link equipment - 1

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema

The type of the connected equipment is displayed.

You can access the menu of the equipment. But you cannot operate it. Use its own remote control to operate the equipment.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - non-VIERA Link equipment - 2

text_image EXIT GUIDE OPTION TITLE TEXT STTL 1 2 abc 3 def 4 gh 5 jd 6 mro 7 pqs 8 tvv 9 wgc 0 REC. PROGRAMME V DOVICE TV H/U

① Set the position to "TV"

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ① Set the position to "TV" - 1

② Follow the operation guide

  • To display the operation guide → ○ If other manufacturers' equipment is accessed, Setup / Contents Selection menu may be displayed.
  • When the key words are displayed on colour bar

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Follow the operation guide - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Follow the operation guide - 2

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Follow the operation guide - 3

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Follow the operation guide - 4

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Follow the operation guide - 5

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Follow the operation guide - 6

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ② Follow the operation guide - 7

Note

Some operations may not be available depending on the equipment. In this case use its own remote control to operate the equipment.

Speaker control Speaker Selection

You can control the home theatre speakers with this TV remote control (point the remote control at the TV's signal receiver).

- If you cannot control the home theatre speakers with this remote control, check the settings and the equipment

→ "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 84 and p. 85), "Preparations" (p. 87)

Access and control the speaker volume
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Speaker control Speaker Selection - 1

text_image Display "VIERA Link Menu" Select "Speaker Selection" VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema OK set to "Home Cinema" or "TV" OK set

Home Cinema

The Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Amplifier will be automatically turned on if it is in Standby mode and the sound will be output from theatre speakers connected to the equipment.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Home Cinema - 1

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Home Cinema - 2

● The sound of the TV speakers is muted.

- When the equipment is turned off, the TV speakers will be activated.

TV

TV speakers are active.

Note

- If you wish to enjoy multi-channel sound (e.g. Dolby Digital 5.1ch) via an Amplifier, connect the Amplifier to the TV with an HDMI cable and an Optical digital audio cable (p. 85), and then select "Home Cinema". If your Amplifier has "HDAVI Control 5" function, you only need to connect with an HDMI cable. In this case, connect your Amplifier to the TV's HDMI2 terminal. To enjoy the sound from the DIGA Recorder in multi-channel sound, connect an HDMI cable from the DIGA Recorder to the Amplifier (p. 85).

Note

These functions may not work properly depending on the connected equipment.

● Image or sound may not be available for the first few seconds when Input mode is switched.
- Easy playback may be available by using the remote control for Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Amplifier. Read the manual of the equipment.
● "HDAVI Control 5" is the newest standard (current as of December, 2009) for HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with conventional HDAVI equipment.
To confirm this TV's version of HDAVI Control "System Information" (p. 36)

External Equipment

These diagrams show our recommendations for connection of your TV to various pieces of equipment. For other connections, consult the instructions for each piece of equipment, the table below, and the specifications (p. 107).

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - External Equipment - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["To listen with speakers"] --> B["Amplifier with speaker system"]
    B --> C["Computer"]
    C --> D["Conversion adapter (if necessary)"]
    D --> E["(Viewing)"]
    E --> F["(Listening)"]
    F --> G["(Listening)"]
    G --> H["(Viewing)"]
    H --> I["(Listening)"]
    I --> J["(Listening)"]
    J --> K["To record / playback"]
    K --> L["DVD Recorder / VCR"]
    L --> M["Terrestrial aerial"]
    M --> N["Fully wired SCART cable"]
    N --> O["RF cable"]
    O --> P["VCL"]
    P --> Q["To watch DVDs"]
    Q --> R["DVD Player"]
    R --> S["(Listening)"]
    S --> T["(Viewing)"]
    T --> U["(Listening)"]
    U --> V["(Listening)"]
    V --> W["(Listening)"]
    W --> X["(Listening)"]
    X --> Y["(Listening)"]
    Y --> Z["(Listening)"]
    Z --> AA["(Listening)"]
    AA --> AB["(Listening)"]
    AB --> AC["(Listening)"]
    AC --> AD["(Listening)"]
    AD --> AE["(Listening)"]
    AE --> AF["(Listening)"]
    AF --> AG["(Listening)"]
    AG --> AH["(Listening)"]
    AH --> AI["(Listening)"]
    AI --> AJ["(Listening)"]
    AJ --> AK["(Listening)"]
    AK --> AL["(Listening)"]
    AL --> AM["(Listening)"]
    AM --> AN["(Listening)"]
    AN --> AO["(Listening)"]
    AO --> AP["(Listening)"]
    AP --> AQ["(Listening)"]
    AQ --> AR["(Listening)"]
    AR --> AS["(Listening)"]
    AS --> AT["(Listening)"]
    AT --> AU["(Listening)"]
    AU --> AV["(Listening)"]
    AV --> AW["(Listening)"]
    AW --> AX["(Listening)"]
    AX --> AY["(Listening)"]
    AY --> AZ["(Listening)"]
    AZ --> BA["(Listening)"]
    BA --> BB["(Listening)"]
    BB --> BC["(Listening)"]
    BC --> BD["(Listening)"]
    BD --> BE["(Listening)"]
    BE --> BF["(Listening)"]
    BF --> BG["(Listening)"]
    BG --> BH["(Listening)"]
    BH --> BI["(Listening)"]
    BI --> BJ["(Listening)"]
    BJ --> BK["(Listening)"]
    BK --> BL["(Listening)"]
    BL --> BM["(Listening)"]
    BM --> BN["(Listening)"]
    BN --> BO["(Listening)"]
    BO --> BP["(Listening)"]
    BP --> BQ["(Listening)"]

Types of connectable equipment to each terminal

Recording / Playback (equipment)TerminalAV1 AV2 AV3(Side panel of the TV) PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - External Equipment - 2
PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - External Equipment - 3PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - External Equipment - 4
To record / playback videocassettes / DVDs (VCR / DVD Recorder)
To watch DVDs (DVD Player)
To watch camcorder images (Video camera)
To watch cable broadcasts (Set top box)
To play games (Game equipment)
To use amplifier with speaker system
To use Network services
USB HDD Recording
Q-Link
VIERA Link○(with HDMI)○(with HDMI)
Direct TV Recording

○ : Recommended Connection

*1 : applicable if your amplifier has ARC (Audio Return Channel) function

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - External Equipment - 5

flowchart
graph TD
    A["USB devices"] --> B["USB cable"]
    B --> C["USB 1"]
    C --> D["Rear of the TV"]
    D --> E["To watch cable broadcasts"]
    E --> F["Cable TV box"]
    F --> G["Fully wired SCART cable"]
    G --> H["Cable"]
    H --> I["Fully wired HDMI compliant cable"]
    I --> J["USB device"]
    J --> K["USB cable"]
    K --> L["USB device"]
    L --> M["Network"]
    M --> N["Internet"]
    N --> O["Modem"]
    O --> P["Hub or Router"]
    P --> Q["USB device"]
    Q --> R["USB cable"]
    R --> S["LAN cable (Shielded)"]
    S --> T["USB device"]
    T --> U["USB cable"]
    U --> V["USB device"]
    V --> W["USB cable"]
    W --> X["USB device"]
    X --> Y["USB cable"]
    Y --> Z["USB device"]
    Z --> AA["USB cable"]
    AA --> AB["USB device"]
    AB --> AC["USB cable"]
    AC --> AD["USB device"]
    AD --> AE["USB cable"]
    AE --> AF["USB device"]
    AF --> AG["USB cable"]
    AG --> AH["USB device"]
    AH --> AI["USB cable"]
    AI --> AJ["USB device"]
    AJ --> AK["USB cable"]
    AK --> AL["USB device"]
    AL --> AM["USB cable"]
    AM --> AN["USB device"]
    AN --> AO["USB cable"]
    AO --> AP["USB device"]
    AP --> AQ["USB cable"]
    AQ --> AR["USB device"]
    AR --> AS["USB cable"]
    AS --> AT["USB device"]
    AT --> AU["USB cable"]
    AU --> AV["USB device"]
    AV --> AW["USB cable"]
    AW --> AX["USB device"]
    AX --> AY["USB cable"]
    AY --> AZ["USB device"]
    AZ --> BA["USB cable"]
    BA --> BB["USB device"]
    BB --> BC["USB cable"]
    BC --> BD["USB device"]
    BD --> BE["USB cable"]
    BE --> BF["USB device"]
    BF --> BG["USB cable"]
    BG --> BH["USB device"]
    BH --> BI["USB cable"]
    BI --> BJ["USB device"]
    BJ --> BK["USB cable"]
    BK --> BL["USB device"]
    BL --> BM["USB cable"]
    BM --> BN["USB device"]
    BN --> BO["USB cable"]
    BO --> BP["USB device"]
    BP --> BQ["USB cable"]
    BQ --> BR["USB device"]
    BR --> BS["USB cable"]
    BS --> BT["USB device"]
    BT --> BU["USB cable"]
    BU --> BV["USB device"]
    BV --> BW["USB cable"]
    BW --> BX["USB device"]
    BX --> BY["USB cable"]
    BY --> BZ["USB device"]
    BZ --> CA["USB cable"]
    CA --> CB["USB device"]
    CB --> CC["USB cable"]
    CC --> CD["USB device"]
    CD --> CE["USB cable"]
    CE --> CF["USB device"]
    CF --> CG["USB cable"]
    CG --> CH["USB device"]
    CH --> CI["USB cable"]
    CI --> CJ["USB device"]
    CJ --> CK["USB cable"]
    CK --> CR["USB device"]
    CR --> CS["USB cable"]
    CS --> CT["USB device"]
    CT --> CU["USB cable"]
    CU --> CV["USB device"]
    CV --> CW["USB cable"]
    CW --> CX["USB device"]
    CX --> CY["USB cable"]
    CY --> CZ["USB device"]
    CZ --> DA["USB cable"]
    DA --> DB["USB device"]
    DB --> DC["USB cable"]
    DC --> DD["USB device"]
    DD --> DE["USB device"]

The optimum size and aspect can be chosen automatically, and you can enjoy finer images. (p. 18)

Aspect Control Signal■

"WIDE" will appear in the top left of the screen if a Widescreen signal (WSS) or a Control signal through SCART / HDMI terminal is found.

The aspect will switch to the appropriate 16:9 or 14:9 widescreen ratio.

This function will work in any aspect mode.

Input terminal Input signal formatAspect Control Signal
Widescreen signal (WSS)Control signal through SCART (pin8) / HDMI terminal
RFDVB
PAL I
PAL 525/60 6.0 MHz –
M.NTSC 6.0 MHz –
Satellite freesat, Other Sat.
AV1 (Composite)PAL
AV2 (Composite or S-Video)
AV3M.NTSC –
NTSC –
COMPONENT525 (480) / 60i –
525 (480) / 60p –
625 (576) / 50i
625 (576) / 50p
750 (720) / 60p –
750 (720) / 50p –
1,125 (1,080) / 60i –
1,125 (1,080) / 50i –
HDMI1525 (480) / 60i –
HDMI2525 (480) / 60p –
HDMI3625 (576) / 50i –
HDMI4625 (576) / 50p –
750 (720) / 60p –
750 (720) / 50p –
1,125 (1,080) / 60i –
1,125 (1,080) / 50i –
1,125 (1,080) / 60p
1,125 (1,080) / 50p
1,125 (1,080) / 24p

■Auto mode

Auto mode determines the best aspect ratio to fill the screen. It does this using a four step process (WSS, Control signal through SCART / HDMI terminal, Letterbox detection, or Justify to fill the screen).

This process may take several minutes, depending on the darkness of the image.

Letterbox detection: If black bands at the top and bottom of the screen are detected, Auto mode chooses the best ratio and expands the image to fill the screen.

If no aspect signals are detected, Auto mode enhances the image for optimum viewing pleasure.

Note

  • The ratio varies depending on the programme, etc. If the ratio is out of the standard 16:9, black bands at the top and bottom of the screen may appear.
  • If the screen size looks unusual when a widescreen-recorded programme is played back on a VCR, adjust the tracking of the VCR. Read the manual of the VCR.

SD Card

  • If the SD Card does not meet SD standards, it may cause the TV to malfunction.
  • Do not remove the card while the TV is accessing data (this can damage card or TV).
  • Do not touch the pins on the back of the card.
  • Do not subject the card to a high pressure or impact.
  • Insert the card in the correct direction (otherwise the card or TV may be damaged).
    Electrical interference, static electricity, or erroneous operation may damage the data or card.
  • Back up the recorded data at regular intervals in case of deteriorated or damaged data or erratic operation of the TV. (Panasonic is not liable for any deterioration or damage of recorded data.)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - SD Card - 1

text_image 2.1 mm 32 mm 24 mm

DivX

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:

DivX ^® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.

Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.

DivX video file

DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.

Extension - ".divx" or ".avi"

Image resolution - Up to 1,920 × 1,080 pixels

Video

Number of stream: Up to 1•

Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DX50, DIV6•

FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 60 fps•

Audio

Number of stream: Up to 8•

Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3•

Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch conversion.

GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.

Subtitle text file of DivX■

Subtitles format - MicroDVD, SubRip, TMPlayer

  • The DivX video file and subtitles text file are inside the same folder, and the file names are the same except for the file extensions.
  • If there are more than one subtitles text files inside the same folder, they are displayed in the following order of priority: ".srt", ".sub", ".txt".
  • To confirm or change the current subtitle status while playing DivX content, press the OPTION button to display Option Menu.
  • Depending on the methods used to create the file or the state of recording, only parts of the subtitles may be displayed, or the subtitles may not be displayed at all.

Note

● Depending on how you make SD Card or USB Flash Memory, files and folders may not be displayed in the order you numbered.
● Depending on the software you use to create DivX files, the files may not play.
- Depending on how you create the files and the structure of folders, the files and folders may not be displayed.
- When there are many files and folders, operation may take time to complete or some files may not be displayed or playable.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:

This DivX Certified ^® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.

To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the Setup Menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.

■To show DivX VOD registration code

→ "DivX® VOD" in the Setup Menu (p. 35)
- If you want to generate the new registration code, you have to deregister the present registration code.

After playing DivX VOD content once, the confirmation screen to deregister will be displayed in "DivX® VOD" in the Setup Menu. If you press the OK button on the confirmation screen, the deregistration code will be generated and you will not be able to play any contents that you purchased using the present registration code.

You will obtain the new registration code by pressing the OK button on the deregistration code screen.

- If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code different from this TV's code, you will not be able to play this content. ("Your device is not authorized to play this DivX protected video." is displayed.)

■Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times

Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.

When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of remaining plays is zero. ("This DivX rental has expired." is displayed.)

- When playing this content, the number of remaining plays is reduced by one in the following conditions:

  • If you exit the current application.
  • If you play the other content.
  • If you go to the next or previous content.

Technical Information

Characters table for numeric buttons

You can enter characters by using numeric buttons for free input items.

Press the numeric button repeatedly until you reach the desired character.

1 2 abc 3

4ghi 5jd 6mou

7 8 9

0

The character is set automatically if you do not press the button for one second.

You can also set the character by pressing the OK button or other numeric buttons within one second.

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Characters table for numeric buttons - 1

text_image User input Name: AB | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N U | V | W | X | Y | Z | O | P | Q | R | S | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T 1.1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.17.18.19.20.21.22.23.24.25.26.27.28.29.30.31.32.33.34.35.36.37.38.39.40.41.42.43.44.45.46.47.48.49.50.51.52.53.54.55.56.57.58.59.60.61.62.63.64.65.66.67.68.69.70.

Characters table:

Numeric buttons\The number of times to press1234567891011
1.1!:#+-*_()
2_abc abc2ABC
3_def def3DEF
4_ghi ghi4GHI
5_jkl jkl5JKL
6_mqj mno6MNO
7_pqs pqrs7PQRS
8_tuv tuv8TUV
9_wzg wxyz9WXYZ
0Space0

SCART and HDMI terminal information

■AV1 SCART terminal

(RGB, VIDEO, Q-Link)

Suitable inputs for AV1 include RGB (Red / Green / Blue).

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■AV1 SCART terminal - 1

text_image Socket Earth 21 CVBS out (video) 19 CVBS earth 17 Red in 15 Red earth 13 Green in 11 Green earth 9 Blue in 7 Blue earth 5 Audio out (L) 3 Audio out (R) 1 20 CVBS in (video) 18 RGB status earth 16 Status RGB 14 Earth 12 -- 10 Q-Link data 8 Status CVBS 6 Audio in (L) 4 Audio earth 2 Audio in (R)

■AV2 SCART terminal

(RGB, VIDEO, S-VIDEO, Q-Link)

AV2 - Pins 15 and 20 are dependent on AV2 S-VHS / VIDEO switching.

Socket Earth

CVBS out (video)

CVBS earth

Red in. S.C. - in

Red earth

Green in

Green earth

Blue in

Blue earth

Audio out (L)

Audio out (R)

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■AV2 SCART terminal - 1

text_image 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 20 CVBS in (video) 18 RGB status earth 16 Status RGB 14 Earth 12 -- 10 Q-Link data 8 Status CVBS 6 Audio in (L) 4 Audio earth 2 Audio in (R)

■HDMI terminal

Hot Plug Detect

DDC/CEC Ground

SCL

CEC

TMDS Clock Shield

TMDS Data0-

TMDS Data0+

TMDS Data1 Shield

TMDS Data2-

TMDS Data2+

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - ■HDMI terminal - 1

text_image 19 18 +5V Power 17 16 SDA 15 14 Reserved (in cable but N.C. on device) 13 12 TMDS Clock- 11 TMDS Clock+ 9 TMDS Data0 Shield 7 TMDS Data1- 5 TMDS Data1+ 3 TMDS Data1+ 1 TMDS Data2 Shield 2 TMDS Data2 Shield

HDMI connection

HDMI (high-definition multimedia interface) is the world's first complete digital consumer AV interface complying with a non-compression standard.

HDMI allows you to enjoy high-definition digital images and high-quality sound by connecting the TV and the equipment.

HDMI-compatible equipment ^(*1) with an HDMI or DVI output terminal, such as a DVD player, a set top box or a game equipment, can be connected to the HDMI terminal using an HDMI compliant (fully wired) cable.

For information about connections, see "External Equipment" (p. 92).

Applicable HDMI features ■

Input audio signal : 2ch Linear PCM (sampling frequencies - 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)

Input video signal : 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i and 1080p

→ "Input signal that can be displayed" (p. 98)

Match the output setting of the digital equipment.

- Input PC signal

:→ "Input signal that can be displayed" (p. 98)

Match the output setting of the PC.

VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 5) : "VIERA Link" (p. 87)

Deep Colour

● Audio Return Channel ^(*3) (HDMI2 terminal only)

■DVI connection

If the external equipment has only a DVI output, connect to the HDMI terminal via a DVI to HDMI adapter cable ^(*2) . When the DVI to HDMI adapter cable is used, connect the audio cable to the audio input terminal (HDMI1 / 2 / 3: use COMPONENT-AUDIO terminals / HDMI4: use AV3 audio terminals).

Note

● Audio settings can be made on the "HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Input" in the Sound Menu. (p. 33)
- If the connected equipment has an aspect adjustment function, set the aspect ratio to "16:9".
●These HDMI connectors are "type A".
● These HDMI connectors are compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection.
● Equipment having no digital output terminal may be connected to the input terminal of either “COMPONENT”, S-VIDEO”, or “VIDEO” to receive analogue signals.
●This TV incorporates HDMI™ technology.

(*1): The HDMI logo is displayed on HDMI-compliant equipment.
(*2): Enquire at your local digital equipment retailer shop.
(*3): Audio Return Channel (ARC) is a function to be able to send digital sound signals via an HDMI cable.

PC connection

A PC may be connected to this TV so that the PC screen is displayed and sound is heard from the TV.

  • PC signals that can be inputted: Horizontal scanning frequency 31 to 69kHz ; vertical scanning frequency 59 to 86Hz (more than 1,024 signal lines could result in incorrect display of the image).
    ● A PC adapter is not necessary for the DOS/V-compliant D-sub 15-pin connector.

Note

● Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV.
- When using PC, set the colour display quality of PC to the highest position.
● For details of the applicable PC signals

→ "Input signal that can be displayed" (p. 98)

● Max. display resolution

Aspect4:31,440 × 1,080 pixels
16:91,920 × 1,080 pixels

● D-sub 15-pin connector signal

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Note - 1

Pin No.Signal NamePin No.Signal NamePin No.Signal Name
1R6GND (Ground)11NC (not connected)
2G7GND (Ground)12NC (not connected)
3B8GND (Ground)13HD
4NC (not connected)9NC (not connected)14VD
5GND (Ground)10GND (Ground)15NC (not connected)

Technical Information

USB connection

- It is recommended to connect the USB HDD or USB Flash Memory directly to the TV's USB ports.

Some USB devices or USB HUB may not be used with this TV.

You cannot connect any devices by using USB card reader.

The combination of USB devices that have been tested for each TV's USB port.

Combination of USB port 1 + port 2 (and vice versa):

USB HDD + USB Flash Memory•

USB HDD + Wireless LAN Adaptor

USB HDD + USB Keyboard•

USB Flash Memory + Wireless LAN Adaptor•

USB Flash Memory + USB Keyboard•

Wireless LAN Adaptor + USB Keyboard•

Note

Additional information for USB devices may be on the following web site. (English only) http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

Input signal that can be displayed

COMPONENT (Y, P_B , P_R ), HDMI
* Mark: Applicable input signal

Signal name COMPONENTHDMI
525 (480) / 60i**
525 (480) / 60p**
625 (576) / 50i**
625 (576) / 50p**
750 (720) / 60p**
750 (720) / 50p**
1,125 (1,080) / 60i**
1,125 (1,080) / 50i**
1,125 (1,080) / 60p*
1,125 (1,080) / 50p*
1,125 (1,080) / 24p*

PC (from D-sub 15P)
Applicable input signal for PC is basically compatible to VESA standard timing.

Signal nameHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
640 × 400 @70 Hz31.4770.07
640 × 480 @60 Hz31.4759.94
640 × 480 @75 Hz37.5075.00
800 × 600 @60 Hz37.8860.32
800 × 600 @75 Hz46.8875.00
800 × 600 @85 Hz53.6785.06
852 × 480 @60 Hz31.4459.89
1,024 × 768 @60 Hz48.3660.00
1,024 × 768 @70 Hz56.4870.07
1,024 × 768 @75 Hz60.0275.03
1,024 × 768 @85 Hz68.6885.00
1,280 × 768 @60 Hz47.7060.00
1,280 × 1,024 @60 Hz63.9860.02
1,366 × 768 @60 Hz48.3960.04
Macintosh13” (640 × 480)35.0066.67
Macintosh16” (832 × 624)49.7374.55
Macintosh21” (1,152 × 870)68.6875.06

PC (from HDMI terminal)
Applicable input signal for PC is basically compatible to HDMI standard timing.

Signal nameHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
640 × 480 @60 Hz31.4760.00
750 (720) / 60p45.0060.00
1,125 (1,080) / 60p67.5060.00

Note

● Signals other than above may not be displayed properly.
● The above signals are reformatted for optimal viewing on your display.
- PC signal is magnified or compressed for display, so that it may not be possible to show fine detail with sufficient clarity.

Before requesting service or assistance, please follow these simple guides to resolve the problem. If the problem still persists, please contact your local Panasonic dealer or Panasonic Customer Care Centre for assistance. For details → p. 108

Block noise, frozen or disappearing image occurs in digital mode / White spots or shadow image (ghosting) occurs in analogue mode / Some channels cannot be tuned

Keep the space between the TV and RF cable.

Check the position, direction and connection of the aerial or dish.

Check "Signal Condition" (p. 43, 46 or p. 48). If ●

"Signal Quality" is displayed in red, the digital signal is weak.

Check your postcode area is able to receive ●

the Freeview channels at www.freeview.co.uk

Digital signals may be relatively low to ●

prevent interference with analogue signals for the period of Digital Switchover. Check the schedule of Digital Switchover at www.

digitaluk.co.uk

Weather conditions will affect signal reception

(heavy rain, snow, etc.), in particular in poor reception areas. Even during good weather, high pressure can cause poor reception of some channels.

Due to the digital reception technologies ●

involved, quality of the digital signals may be relatively low in some cases, despite good reception of analogue channels.

Turn the TV off with the Mains power On / Off switch, and then on again.

If problem persists, consult your local dealer.

Neither image nor sound is produced

●Is the TV in AV mode?
- Check the correct AV input mode is selected.
- Check the mains lead is plugged into the socket outlet.
●Has the TV been turned On?
- Check the Picture Menu (p. 32) and volume.
- Check all required cables and connections are firmly in place.

Auto aspect

● Auto aspect is designed to provide you with the best ratio to fill the screen. (p. 94)
- Press the ASPECT button if you would like to change the aspect ratio manually (p. 18).

freesat Auto Setup cannot be done completely

  • Check connections and dish alignment. The dish needs to be pointing at Astra 2 at 28.2^ East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5^ East.
  • If the problem persists, consult your freesat registered retailer or call Freesat (UK) Ltd on 08450 990 990 or visit www.freesat.co.uk

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - freesat Auto Setup cannot be done completely - 1

natural_image Front view of a flat-screen television displaying (no text or symbols visible)

S-Video / black and white picture

  • A black and white picture may be seen when the TV is set to S-Video when the connected equipment is not. Change the setting on the TV (p. 28).
  • Check that the output of the external equipment matches the input of the TV. If the output of the external equipment is set to S-Video, the TV must also be set to S-Video (p. 28).

Input mode, i.e. EC/AV1 remains on the screen

- Press the i button to clear this message. Press again to redisplay.

- Confirm SCART cable and connection. Also set "AV1 / AV2 out" in the Setup Menu (p. 34).

  • Confirm the connection. (p. 84 and p. 85)
    ●Turn the connected equipment on and then switch the TV on. (p. 87)

Recording does not start immediately

- Check the settings of the recorder. For details, read the manual of the recorder.

There may be red spots, blue spots, green spots and black spots on the screen

- This is a characteristic of liquid crystal panels and is not a problem. The liquid crystal panel is built with very high precision technology giving you fine picture details. Occasionally, a few non-active pixels may appear on the screen as a fixed point of red, green, blue or black. Please note this does not affect the performance of your LCD.

Problem Actions
ScreenChaotic image, noisySet “P-NR” in the Picture Menu (to remove noise). (p. 32)Check nearby electrical products(fluorescent lamp, DECT phones, mobile phones, microwave, etc.).
No image can be displayedIs “Contrast”, “Brightness” or “Colour” in the Picture Menu set to the minimum? (p. 32)Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” (p. 99).
Blurry or distorted image(no sound or low volume)Reset channels. (p. 40 and p. 41)Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” (p. 99).
Unusual image is displayedTurn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch, then turn it On again.If the problem persists, perform “Shipping Condition” (p. 51).
SoundNo sound is producedIs “Sound mute” active? (p. 8)Is the volume set to the minimum?Is Speaker Selection (VIERA Link) set to “TV”?Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” (p. 99).
Sound level is lowor sound is distortedSound signal reception may be deteriorated.Set “NICAM” (p. 33) in the Sound Menu to “Off”. (Analogue only)Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” (p. 99).
Digital ChannelNo programmes shown on TV GuideReset channels. (p. 40 and p. 41)Check the digital transmission by contacting Digital UK on08456 50 50 50 or at www.digitaluk.co.ukCheck the analogue broadcast (if still available in your area).Consult an aerial or dish engineer to check the alignment of youraerial or dish.
Cannot find a channelyou have previously watchedThe channel may broadcast for part of the day.Check the channel in the TV Guide. (p. 20)Channel position numbers may be changed by broadcasters.Reset channels. (p. 40 and p. 41)
HDMISound is unusualSet the sound setting of the connected equipment to “2ch L.PCM”.Check the “HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Input” setting in the Sound Menu. (p. 33If digital sound connection has a problem, select analogue sound connection. (p. 97)
Pictures from external equipment are unusual when the equipment is connected via HDMICheck the HDMI cable is connected properly. (p. 92)Turn the TV and equipment Off, then turn them On again.Check an input signal from the equipment. (p. 97)Check the output resolution of the equipment.Use equipment compliant with EIA/CEA-861/861B.
NetworkCannot connect to the networkCheck the LAN cable or Wireless LAN Adaptor is connected properly. (p. 75)Check the connections and settings. (p. 75 - 79)Check the network equipment and network environment.The router may not be set to issue IP address automatically. If the network administrator prefers to allocate an IP address, set an IP address manually. (p. 77)The router may be using MAC address filtering (security setting). Confirm the MAC Address of this TV (p. 76) and set the router to be able to use it.If the problem persists, consult your Internet Service Provider or telecommunications company.
Cannot select the file during DLNA operationsIs media server of the connected equipment prepared? (p. 74)Check applicable data format. (p. 74)
Cannot operate VIERA CASTCheck the connections and settings. (p. 75 - 79)The server or connected line might be busy now.
OtherThe TV does not switch OnPress and hold the standby On / Off switch on the remote control for about 1 second if Power LED is red.Check the mains lead is plugged into the socket.The fuse in the mains plug may have blown. Replace it with one of an identical rating (p. 4).
The TV goes into Standby modeAuto power standby function is activated. (p. 9)The TV enters Standby mode about 30 mins. after analogue broadcast ends.
The remote control does not work or is intermittentAre the batteries installed correctly? (p. 8)Has the TV been switched On?The batteries may be running low. Replace them.Point the remote control directly at the front of the TV (within about 7 m and a 30 degree angle of the front of the TV).Situate the TV so that sunshine or other sources of bright light do not shine on the TV's remote control signal receiver.
Parts of the TV become hotTemperature rises of parts of the front, top and rear panels will not pose any problems in terms of performance or quality of the TV.
The LCD panel moves slightly when it is pushed with a finger Clattered sound might be heardThere is some flexibility around the panel to prevent damage to the panel.The panel might move slightly when it is pushed with a finger, and clattered sound might be heard. This is not a malfunction.
Overcurrent error message appearsThe connected USB device might cause this error. Remove the device and turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch, then turn it On again.Check if foreign objects are inside the USB port.
An error message appearsFollow the message's instructions.If the problem persists, contact your local Panasonic dealer or the authorized Service Centre.

On screen messages

Message Meaning / Aon
All contents will be lost.Are you sure to delete this device?Once you unregister the USB HDD, all the recorded programme will be erased.
All tuning data will be erased"Shipping Condition" will erase all tuning data (p. 51).
Are you sure ? Confirm correct operation.
Are you sure you want to delete this timer ?Press OK to delete timer.Press RETURN to return.Confirm correct operation.
Bad signalThe signal is weak. Check the aerial is plugged in properly. It may be necessary to have an aerial installer check the signal and aerial alignment. Reset channels. (p. 40 and p. 41)
Cannot register another device because the list is full.Up to 8 USB HDDs can be registered with this TV.
Child Lock is active!Press OK to enter PIN.The selected channel is locked in Child Lock (p. 54). You must enter the PIN number before the channel will be displayed.
Faulty dishThe satellite cable might be short-circuited or there might be connection problems of the cable. Check the cable and connection and then turn the TV Off with the Mains power On / Off switch, and turn it On again.If the message still persists, it may be necessary to have a dish installer check the dish and cable.
Feature not available.It is not possible to record from COMPONENT or HDMI. Connect the recorder to the TV using a fully wired SCART cable for recording from the TV tuner.Confirm Q-Link or VIERA Link settings (p. 84 - 87).
Feature not available.Press OK to view how it works.The selected feature on VIERA TOOLS is not available. Press the OK button to view the demonstration to explain how to use it.
Found new software version * * * .Press OK to start update (may take 40 mins) or Press EXIT to ignore and you can update when TV is in standbyThere is a new software available.
Invalid operation - Please check settings and connections.Check the Q-Link or VIERA Link connection and setting (p. 84 - 87).
Invalid system time. Please exit !Cannot get the time information and cannot edit Timer Programming screen. Check the connection of the RF cable.
Invalid system time, Timer Programming will not work.Please press TV button on remote control and check time display on BannerCannot get the time information. If there is no time displayed on the Information banner, check the connection of the RF cable.
Max. number of timers already set !The maximum number of timer programming events is 15.
New channels found!Press OK to update channel list.Press EXIT to ignore.There may be new channels available.This message will appear each time a change is made by the broadcasters. This message can be deactivated by setting "New Channel Message" to Off in "DVB Tuning Menu".Selecting OK will perform "Update Channel List".
No channel found.Please check aerial or local signal availability.Press OK to start Auto Setup.Follow the on screen instructions.Please also refer to p. 99.If channels are still not found, consult your local Panasonic dealer.
No module insertedCheck the CI module is inserted completely (p. 57).
No recording - Already recordingThe equipment may already be recording.
No recording - Check mediaThe tape or disc may be "write protected", full, missing or damaged.
No recording - PlayingThe equipment may be playing the tape or disc.
No recording - Unknown reasonThe recording may not be performed. Check the equipment.
No serviceThe broadcaster has stopped the service. Check the channel in the TV Guide. (p. 20)
No signalThe TV cannot detect the signal. Check the connection of the RF cable.
Overcurrent error on USB device occurred.Please remove the USB device, and switch off the TV by mains power switch.The connected USB device might cause overcurrent error. Follow the on screen instructions.Check if foreign objects are inside the USB port.

Message Meaning / A on

PIN incorrect! The PIN number you entered is wrong.
Please check settings and connections on HDMI devices.Communication error in VIERA Link function (p. 87).
Please enter a frequency between 10700 and 12750 MHz.The frequency you entered is out of range. Consult the received satellite broadcasting company. (p. 48).
Please wait.A function is in progress.
Recording this channel nowThe recorder is recording the programme from its own tuner. You can turn the TV off and leave the equipment recording in the normal way.
Reset to Factory Shipping Condition Completed. Please switch off TV."Auto Setup" will automatically start when Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On. (p. 12)
Sending Preset DataQ-Link or VIERA Link channel download is in progress.
Software successfully updated. Press EXIT to continue.The software updating is finished.
Software update failed. Please try again later. Press EXIT to continue.Perform "System Update Search Now" in System Update (p. 58).If this is still unsuccessful, there may not be any new software available.
The device is not directly connected to the TV. The device may not work correctly.Please do not connect the device via a USB HUB.
This timer will not follow the TV Guide information. Press OK to continue, RETURN to restore original timer.If you edit the start time or end time of Guide link programming by more than 10 minutes, it will no longer be performed as Guide link programming. The programming will be performed according to the time setting.
Timer already expired !The starting time in Timer Programming has already passed. Set the timer correctly (p. 53).
Timer Event Due to Start * * * : * * * has been programmed for External (USB HDD) recording at * * : * *This message will appear 2 mins. before timer programming event for external (USB HDD) recording due to start.
Timer incorrect !Set the start and end times in Timer Programming correctly (p. 53).
Timer overlap. Press OK to keep, RETURN to edit.Timer programming events are overlapped. Press the OK button to keep the overlapped setting. "Ext Rec." and "USB HDD Rec." are given priority over "Reminder". When two or more "Ext Rec." / "USB HDD Rec." overlap, the first timer programming event starts and finishes as programmed. The next timer programming event can then start.
Tuner Locked Press EXIT to unlock and stop recordingIf you want to unlock the tuner, cancel Direct TV Recording (p. 86 and p. 88), the recording of Timer Programming (p. 53) or One Touch Recording.
Unable to download, please check equipmentThe tape or disc is active. Stop the equipment and try again.

■Media Player

Cannot read fileThe file is damaged or unreadable.The TV does not support the format. (For the applicable formats and data ➔ p. 66)
No Device InsertedConfirm the SD Card or USB device is inserted correctly.
No valid file to playThe card has no data.
Please confirm the Device is OKThe inserted SD Card or USB device has a problem.
This operation is not possibleThe selected operation is not available.

Network

An internal error occurred.Check the settings. (p. 76 - 79)
Cannot read fileThe file is broken or unreadable.Check applicable data format. (p. 74)
Communication with the server failed.This might be a problem of the media server.Read the manual of the server software.
Connection to the server failed.Check the connections and settings. (p. 75 - 79)
Server not foundThere are no available media server on your home network.Check the connections and settings. (p. 75 - 79)
The software update is not completed.Network download failed.Check the connections and settings. (p. 75 - 79)
Ethernet cable not connectedCheck the connection of the LAN cable. If you use a hub, also check the light on the hub is lit.The LAN cable might be defective.

Maintenance

First, remove the mains plug from the socket outlet.

Display panel, Cabinet, Stand

Regular care:

Gently wipe the surface of the display panel, cabinet, or stand by using a soft cloth to clean the dirt or fingerprints. For stubborn dirt:

Dampen a soft cloth with clean water or diluted neutral detergent (1 part detergent to 100 parts water). Then wring the cloth and wipe the surface. Finally, wipe away all the moisture.

Caution

  • Do not use a hard cloth or rub the surface too hard. This may cause scratches on the surface.
    Take care not to subject the TV's surfaces to water or detergent more than requires. A liquid inside the TV could lead to product failure.
    ● Take care not to subject the surfaces to insect repellent, solvent, thinner or other volatile substances. This may degrade surface quality or cause peeling of the paint.
  • The surface of the display panel is specially treated and may be easily damaged. Take care not to tap or scratch the surface with your fingernail or other hard objects.
  • Do not allow the cabinet or stand to make contact with a rubber or PVC substance for a long time. This may degrade surface quality.

Mains plug

Wipe the mains plug with a dry cloth at regular intervals. Moisture and dust may lead to fire or electrical shock.

Glossary

AAC

Advanced Audio Coding - An advanced audio compression method

AVCHD

Advanced Video Codec High Definition - A standard for high definition video cameras that can be used to record and play high resolution HD images

DLNA

Digital Living Network Alliance

DVB

Digital Video Broadcasting

DVD

Digital Versatile Disc

DVI

Digital Visual Interface - A high quality video interface standard to connect to the display

EPG

Electronic Programme Guide - A digital guide showing scheduled programmes

HDMI

High-Definition Multimedia Interface - A digital audio and video interface for transmitting uncompressed digital signals on a single cable

JPEG

Joint Photographic Experts Group - A standard for compressing colour still pictures

LAN

Local Area Network

■MAC Address

Media Access control Address

MPEG2

Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2 - A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour videos

MP3

MPEG Audio Layer 3 - A method for compressing audio data

NICAM

Near Instantaneous Companded Audio Multiplex - A format for digital sound over television

NTSC

National Television System Committee - One of the television signals used in USA, etc.

RF

Radio Frequency - Signal received from terrestrial aerial

■RGB / S-Video / Video

Choose between these three video formats depending on personal preference and equipment requirement (RGB - Red, Green and Blue)

SCART

21 pin connection used for video, audio and switching signals (Also known as Euro SCART and Peritel)

■Shop viewing environment

Shop viewing environment is the demonstration mode to explain main features of this TV in an easy understandable way. This mode will work if you select "Shop" in "Auto Setup" (p. 15).

■SPDIF

A standard audio transfer file format

USB

Universal Serial Bus - An interface specification to connect devices

VCR

Video Cassette Recorder

Licence

Even if no special notation has been made of company or product trademarks, these trademarks have been fully respected.

- “freesat” is a registered trademark and the “freesat” logo is a trademark of Freesat (UK) Ltd.

DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.

VGA is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., USA.

S-VGA is a registered trademark of the Video Electronics Standard Association.

SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

●“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

GUIDE Plus+ is (1) a registered trademark or trademark of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.

VIERA CAST™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

- DLNA ^ , the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED ^TM are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

● Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

- DivX ^ is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under license.

●YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.

- Skype™ is a trademark of Skype Limited.

The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.

This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.

Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.

See http://www.mpegla.com.

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

Index

A Accessories 6

Advanced Picture Settings 60

Analogue Tuning Menu 41, 46

Aspect 18,

Astra 1

Astra 2 10,49,99

Audio Description 19,33

Auto Setup 12,40

Auto Standby

AV1 / AV2 out 34, 86

B Banner Display Timeout 35

C Cable TV box 11,36,92

Category list

C.A.T.S.

Channel Genre

Channel List 43, 45, 47, 50

Channel Sorting by Region 44

Child Lock

Clamper

Common Interface

COMPONENT 93,

Connection 10, 11, 62, 66, 75, 84, 85, 92

D Direct TV Recording 86, 88

Dish alignment 10

DivX

DLNA

D-sub 15-pin

DVB Tuning Menu 41,44

DVI

DVI Input Setting 36

DVD Recorder 11, 29, 92, 93

E EPG 20,21

Eurobird 1 10,99

External equipment 11, 28, 92, 93

External input 28, 29

F FAQs 99-101

Favourites Edit 43, 45, 50

Free input menu 31,97

freesat Tuning Menu

G Glossary 104

Guide link programming 23

GUIDE Plus+ Settings 36

H HDMI 96, 97, 107

HDMI Content Detection 34

Hold 17,

Home Cinema

Hotbird

Information banner 17

Input Labels

Input signal

Intelligent Frame Creation 36

Last view 19

Licence

M Mains Lead 10

Mains power On / Off switch 9, 12

Maintenance

Manual Tuning 44, 47, 48

Media Player 66-

Menu Functions 31

Mode

Monaural Audio

Multi Audio

Music Mode

N Network connections 75

Network Setup 76

New Channel Message 46

94NICAM 33

4NTSC 32, 107

Off Timer 19,34

One Touch Recording 65

41 Other Sat. Tuning Menu 48

36 Optional accessories 6

Owner ID 14,56

P PAL 107

PC 59, 97

2Photo mode 68

32PIN number 14,54,56

2@Playing Time Display

P-NR 32

Power and Timer LED 9,22,52,65

54 Q-Link 34,84,86

10Q-Link Download 12.34

Quick Start Guide 6-15

98 Radio Mode 35

K Radio Mode 35 Remote control 6.8

Remote control 6,8

Reset to Defaults 32, 33

99 Reversal Film Effect 32

95 Rewind LIVE TV

74 RGB 107

S Safely remove USB 19, 63, 67

97Sales and Support Information 108

SCART 96, 107

SD Card 66,94

Search list 20

Shipping Condition 51

Signal Condition 43, 46, 48

Slideshow 68, 81

Specifications 107

Split Programme 23

Stand 7

Subtitles 18,27

40, 48-Video 96, 107

System Update 58

Teletext 25-27

Timer Programming 22,52

True Cinema 32

TV Guide 20-24

U26Update Channel List 46

USB Flash Memory 66

49 USB HDD 62

USB Keyboard 83

V55-Audio ProSurround 33

V8R 11,29,92,93

Video mode 70

VIERA CAST 83

105VIERA Link 84, 85, 87-91

VIERA TOOLS 30

Viewing Mode 32

Vivid Colour 32

104Volume Correction 19,33

W Wireless LAN Adaptor 6,13,75

WSS 94

34 Zoom 18

19

19

73

Specifications

TX-L32D28BPTX-L32D28BSTX-L32D28BWTX-L37D28BS
Power SourceAC 220-240 V, 50 / 60 Hz
Rated Power Consumption136 W 147 W
Standby Power Consumption0.30 W36.00 W (With monitor out recording)
Display panelAspect Ratio16:9
Visible screen size80 cm (diagonal)698 mm (W) × 392 mm (H)94 cm (diagonal)819 mm (W) × 460 mm (H)
Number of pixels2,073,600 (1,920 (W) × 1,080 (H))
SoundSpeaker140 mm × 35 mm × 2 pcs, 8 Ω
Audio Output20 W (10 W + 10 W), 10% THD
HeadphonesM3 (3.5 mm) stereo mini Jack × 1
PC signalsVGA, SVGA, WVGA, XGASXGA, WXGA ...... (compressed)Horizontal scanning frequency 31 - 69 kHzVertical scanning frequency 59 - 86 Hz
Receiving Systems / Band nameDVB-S / S2 : freesat services via Satellite dish input.freesat Receiver frequency range - 950 MHz to 2,150 MHzOther Sat.) LNB Power and Polarisation - Vertical: +13 V Horizontal: +18 V Current: Max. 500 mA (overload protection)22 kHz Tone - Frequency: 22 kHz ± 2 kHz Amplitude: 0.6 V ± 0.2 VSymbol Rate - Max. 30 MS/sFEC Mode - 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10Demodulation- QPSK, 8PSKNot available for DiSEqC control.DVB-T / T2 : Digital terrestrial services via UHF aerial input.PAL I: UHF E21-68PAL 525/60 : Playback of NTSC tape from some PAL Video recorders (VCR) orNTSC disc playback from DVD player and recorder.M.NTSC : Playback from M.NTSC Video recorders (VCR).NTSC (AV input only): Playback from NTSC Video recorders (VCR).
Satellite dish inputFemale F-type 75 Ω
Aerial inputUHF
Operating ConditionsTemperature: 0 °C - 35 °CHumidity: 20 % - 80 % RH (non-condensing)
Connection TerminalsAV1 (SCART terminal)21 Pin terminal (Audio/Video in, Audio/Video out, RGB in, Q-Link)
AV2 (SCART terminal)21 Pin terminal (Audio/Video in, Audio/Video out, RGB in, S-Video in, Q-Link)
AV3VIDEORCA PIN Type × 1 1.0 V[p-p] (75 Ω)
AUDIO L - RRCA PIN Type × 2 0.5 V[rms]
COMPONENTVIDEOY 1.0 V[p-p] (including synchronization)PB, PR ±0.35 V[p-p]
AUDIO L - RRCA PIN Type × 2 0.5 V[rms]
OthersHDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4TYPE A ConnectorsHDMI1 / 3 / 4 : HDMI (Version 1.4 with Content Type), Deep ColourHDMI2 : HDMI (Version 1.4 with Content Type, Audio Return Channel), Deep Colour● This TV supports "HDAVI Control 5" function.
PCHIGH-DENSITY D-SUB 15PIN R,G,B/0.7 V[p-p] (75 Ω)HD, VD/TTL Level 2.0 - 5.0 V[p-p] (high impedance)
Card slotSD Card slot × 1Common Interface slot × 1
ETHERNETRJ45, IEEE802.3 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX
USB 1 / 2USB2.0 DC 5 V, Max 500 mA ● For available USB devices ➔ p. 98
OutputAUDIO L - RRCA PIN Type × 2 0.5 V[rms] (high impedance)
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPCM / Dolby Digital, Fiber optic
Dimensions(W × H × D)With Stand795 mm × 536 mm × 201 mm917 mm × 605 mm × 291 mm
TV only795 mm × 521 mm × 77 mm(With speaker part)795 mm × 521 mm × 45 mm(Without speaker part)917 mm × 590 mm × 77 mm(With speaker part)917 mm × 590 mm × 45 mm(Without speaker part)
Mass17.0 kg Net (With Stand)12.0 kg Net (TV only)20.0 kg Net (With Stand)14.5 kg Net (TV only)
  • Design and Specifications are subject to change without notice. Mass and Dimensions shown are approximate.
    ● This equipment complies with the EMC standards listed below.
    EN55013, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

PANASONIC Viera TX-L32D28BW - Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries - 1

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

For business users in the European Union

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

Sales and Support Information

Customer Care Centre

For customers within the UK: • 0844 844 3852

For customers within the Republic of Ireland: • 01 289 8333

Visit our website for product information: • www.panasonic.co.uk

E-mail: customer.care@panasonic.co.uk

Direct Sales at Panasonic UK

For customers: • 0844 844 3856

Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre • Monday — Thursday 9:00am — 5:30pm, Friday 9:30am — 5:30pm (Excluding public holidays).

- Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at www.pas-europe.com. Most major credit and debit cards accepted.

- All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.

- It couldn't be simpler!

- Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide range of finished products, take a browse on our website for further details.

CE

Declaration of Conformity (DoC)

If you want to get a copy of the original DoC of this TV, please visit the following website:

http://www.doc.panasonic.de

Authorized Representative:

Panasonic Testing Centre

Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Customer's Record

The model number and serial number of this product may be found on its rear panel. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this book, plus your purchase receipt, as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft or loss, and for Warranty Service purposes.

Model Number

Serial Number

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : PANASONIC

Model : Viera TX-L32D28BW

Category : TV